Aficio MP 301 Series Service Manual

Model S-C5
Machine Code: D127/D128
Field Service Manual
24 February, 2012
Important Safety Notices
Prevention of Physical Injury
1. Be sure that the power cord is unplugged before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier or
peripherals.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that electrical voltage is supplied to some components of the copier and the paper tray unit
even while the main power switch is off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off or open while the
main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified or mechanically driven components.
5. If you start a job before the copier completes the warm-up or initializing period, keep hands away
from the mechanical and electrical components until job execution has started. The copier will start
making copies as soon as warm-up or initialization is finished.
6. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while the copier is operating.
Be careful to avoid touching those components with your bare hands.
Health Safety Conditions
Toner and developer are nontoxic, but getting either of these into your eyes may cause temporary eye
discomfort. Try to remove with eye drops or flush with water. If material remains in eye or if discomfort
continues, get medical attention.
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards
The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a customer service representative
who has completed the training course on those relevant models.
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an explosion might
occur if this precaution is not observed.
Lithium Batteries
Incorrect replacement of lithium battery(s) on the FCU, controller board and memory board unit may
pose risk of explosion. Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the
manufacturer. Discard used batteries in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
1
Safe and Ecological Disposal
1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly if exposed to an open
flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors in accordance with local
regulations. (These are nontoxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do not put more than 100
batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not sealing them apart may lead to chemical
reactions and heat build-up.
Laser Safety
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair of laser-based optical units
in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repaired in a factory or at a location with the requisite
equipment. The laser subsystem is replaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser
chassis is not repairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return all chassis and
laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement of the optical subsystem is required.
• Use of controls not specified in this manual, or performance of adjustments or procedures not
specified in this manual, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
• Do not use the cleaner to suck spilled toner (including used toner). Sucked toner may cause firing
or explosion due to electrical contact flickering inside the cleaner. However, it is possible to use the
cleaner designed for dust explosion-proof purpose. If toner is spilled over the floor, sweep up
spilled toner slowly and clean remainder with wet cloth.
WARNING FOR LASER UNIT
2
• Turn off the main switch before attempting any of the procedures in the Laser Unit section. Laser
beams can seriously damage your eyes.
CAUTION MARKING:
3
Symbols and Abbreviations
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations is
as follows:
See or Refer to
Clip ring
E-ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
- Core Technology manual
Cautions, Notes, etc.

The following headings provide special information:
• Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death.
• Obey these guidelines to ensure safe operation and prevent minor injuries.
• This information provides tips and advice about how to best service the machine.
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Important Safety Notices...................................................................................................................................1
Prevention of Physical Injury..........................................................................................................................1
Health Safety Conditions...............................................................................................................................1
Observance of Electrical Safety Standards.................................................................................................1
Lithium Batteries..............................................................................................................................................1
Safe and Ecological Disposal.......................................................................................................................2
Laser Safety.....................................................................................................................................................2
Symbols and Abbreviations...............................................................................................................................4
1. Product Information
Specifications....................................................................................................................................................13
Machine Configuration....................................................................................................................................14
Mainframe....................................................................................................................................................14
System Components....................................................................................................................................15
Overview..........................................................................................................................................................17
Component Layout.......................................................................................................................................17
Mainframe...........................................................................................................................................17
ARDF....................................................................................................................................................18
Electrical Components.................................................................................................................................19
Electrical Components 1.....................................................................................................................19
Electrical Components 2.....................................................................................................................20
ARDF....................................................................................................................................................21
Paper Path....................................................................................................................................................22
Drive Layout..................................................................................................................................................23
Mainframe...........................................................................................................................................23
ARDF....................................................................................................................................................24
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products..............................................................25
2. Installation
Installation Cautions.........................................................................................................................................27
Installation Requirements.................................................................................................................................28
Environment..................................................................................................................................................28
Machine Level..............................................................................................................................................29
Minimum Operational Space Requirements.............................................................................................29
Power Requirements....................................................................................................................................30
5
Copier...............................................................................................................................................................31
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................31
Printer/Scanner (D127)/ Scanner and Fax Model (D128)..........................................................31
Installation Procedure.........................................................................................................................31
Interface settings .................................................................................................................................35
Copier settings ....................................................................................................................................35
Fax Settings..........................................................................................................................................36
Optional Handset........................................................................................................................................36
Accessory Check.................................................................................................................................36
Paper Tray Unit (D661)...................................................................................................................................39
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................39
Installation Procedure..................................................................................................................................39
Paper Tray Unit Heater....................................................................................................................................42
Accessory Check..........................................................................................................................................42
Installation Procedure (For one of PTU installed machine).......................................................................43
Installation Procedure (For two of PTU installed machine).......................................................................49
Joint bracket (Joint the copier and the upper PTU)....................................................................................56
Joint bracket (Joint the upper and the lower PTU).....................................................................................57
Controller Options............................................................................................................................................58
Overview......................................................................................................................................................58
Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11a/g) Installation...........................................................................................58
Accessories..........................................................................................................................................58
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g Wireless LAN....................................................................60
IEEE 1284 Installation.................................................................................................................................60
Accessories..........................................................................................................................................60
VM Card Type S (D656)............................................................................................................................61
Accessories..........................................................................................................................................61
Installation............................................................................................................................................62
Gigabit Ethernet...........................................................................................................................................62
Fax Option (D655)......................................................................................................................................63
6
Component Check..............................................................................................................................64
Grounding Wire..................................................................................................................................66
HDD Option (D659)...................................................................................................................................66
Component Check..............................................................................................................................66
Installing the Security Card.................................................................................................................69
Activating the Security Applications..................................................................................................70
HDD Encryption Recovery from a Device Problem..........................................................................70
Restoring the Encryption key..............................................................................................................71
Clearing the NVRAM..........................................................................................................................71
3. Preventive Maintenance
Maintenance Tables........................................................................................................................................73
How to Clear the PM Counter.........................................................................................................................74
4. Replacement and Adjustment
Precautions........................................................................................................................................................75
General.........................................................................................................................................................75
Lithium Batteries............................................................................................................................................75
Halogen-free Cable....................................................................................................................................75
Static Electricity............................................................................................................................................76
Special Tools and Lubricants...........................................................................................................................77
Exterior Covers and Operation Panel............................................................................................................78
Rear Cover...................................................................................................................................................78
Copy Tray.....................................................................................................................................................78
Operation Panel...........................................................................................................................................79
Right Door.....................................................................................................................................................81
Bypass Tray..................................................................................................................................................81
Platen Cover and ARDF Sensor..................................................................................................................82
Scanner Unit.....................................................................................................................................................83
Scanner Cover and Exposure Glass..........................................................................................................83
LED Unit........................................................................................................................................................83
Scanner Motor.............................................................................................................................................84
Scanner HP Sensor......................................................................................................................................85
7
Fusing................................................................................................................................................................86
Fusing Unit....................................................................................................................................................86
Exit Sensor....................................................................................................................................................87
Hot Roller Stripper Pawls.............................................................................................................................87
Hot Roller and Fusing Lamp........................................................................................................................88
Thermoswitches and Thermistor..................................................................................................................90
Pressure Roller..............................................................................................................................................91
Fusing NIP Band Check By-pass (Checking the NIP band).....................................................................92
PCU and Quenching Lamp..............................................................................................................................93
PCU...............................................................................................................................................................93
Quenching Lamp..........................................................................................................................................94
Exhaust Fan and Main Motor.........................................................................................................................95
Exhaust Fan..................................................................................................................................................95
Main Motor..................................................................................................................................................95
Paper Feed........................................................................................................................................................97
Paper Feed Roller and Friction Pad............................................................................................................97
Paper End Sensor.........................................................................................................................................98
Registration Sensor......................................................................................................................................98
Bypass Paper End Sensor............................................................................................................................99
Bypass Feed Roller....................................................................................................................................100
Bypass Feed Clutch and Friction Pad......................................................................................................101
Paper Feed and Registration Clutches.....................................................................................................102
Image Transfer...............................................................................................................................................103
Transfer Roller............................................................................................................................................103
ID Sensor and Duplex Roller....................................................................................................................104
Discharge plate.........................................................................................................................................106
BICU and Controller Board..........................................................................................................................107
BICU...........................................................................................................................................................107
Preparation........................................................................................................................................107
Procedure..........................................................................................................................................107
Controller Board........................................................................................................................................108
Preparation:.......................................................................................................................................108
Procedure..........................................................................................................................................108
8
When installing a new controller board.........................................................................................110
When replacing the NVRAM on the controller board..................................................................111
Other Replacements......................................................................................................................................113
Duplex Motor............................................................................................................................................113
High-Voltage Power Supply Board ........................................................................................................114
PSU.............................................................................................................................................................115
Contact-Release Solenoid........................................................................................................................116
Toner Supply Motor..................................................................................................................................116
FCU.............................................................................................................................................................117
Lithium Batteries.................................................................................................................................117
Procedure..........................................................................................................................................117
Laser Unit........................................................................................................................................................119
Location of the Caution Decal..................................................................................................................119
Laser Unit....................................................................................................................................................120
LD Unit and Polygon Mirror Motor..........................................................................................................121
ARDF...............................................................................................................................................................122
ARDF Unit...................................................................................................................................................122
When installing the ARDF................................................................................................................123
ARDF Rear Cover......................................................................................................................................124
Original Feed Unit.....................................................................................................................................124
Pick-up Roller.............................................................................................................................................125
Feed Roller.................................................................................................................................................125
Friction Pad................................................................................................................................................127
DFRB...........................................................................................................................................................128
ARDF Top Cover Sensor/ Original Set Sensor......................................................................................128
ARDF Drive Motor.....................................................................................................................................128
White Plate.................................................................................................................................................131
When installing the white plate.......................................................................................................132
Registration Sensor....................................................................................................................................132
Adjusting Copy Image Area.........................................................................................................................134
Printing........................................................................................................................................................134
Adjusting Registration.......................................................................................................................134
Adjusting Blank Margin....................................................................................................................135
9
Adjusting Main-Scan Magnification...............................................................................................136
Scanning....................................................................................................................................................136
Adjusting Registration.......................................................................................................................137
Adjusting Magnification...................................................................................................................138
DF Image Adjustment................................................................................................................................138
5. System Maintenance Reference
Service Program.............................................................................................................................................141
SP Tables....................................................................................................................................................141
Using SP and SSP Modes.........................................................................................................................141
Starting SP Mode..............................................................................................................................142
Selecting Programs...........................................................................................................................142
Specifying Values.............................................................................................................................142
Activating Copy Mode.....................................................................................................................142
Quitting Programs/Ending (S) SP Mode........................................................................................142
Conventions used in the tables:.......................................................................................................142
Using SP Mode..............................................................................................................................................144
NVRAM Data Upload/Download..........................................................................................................144
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card...............................................................................144
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM...........................................................................................144
Firmware Update Procedure....................................................................................................................145
Before You Begin…...........................................................................................................................145
Firmware Update Procedure...........................................................................................................146
Error Messages.................................................................................................................................147
Firmware Update Error.....................................................................................................................147
Recovery after Power Loss...............................................................................................................148
Browser Unit Update Procedure..............................................................................................................148
Handling Firmware Update Errors...........................................................................................................149
Error Message Table........................................................................................................................149
Test Pattern Print (SP2-109-001).............................................................................................................150
Executing Test Pattern Printing.........................................................................................................150
Test Patterns.......................................................................................................................................151
Memory Clear...........................................................................................................................................152
Exceptions.........................................................................................................................................152
10
Memory Clear Procedure................................................................................................................153
SMC Print (SP5-990)................................................................................................................................153
ID Sensor Error Analysis (SP2-220)........................................................................................................153
Fax Service Tables.........................................................................................................................................155
6. Troubleshooting
SC Tables.......................................................................................................................................................157
Summary....................................................................................................................................................157
Engine SC Code Descriptions..................................................................................................................158
SC Code Descriptions...............................................................................................................................169
SC6xx................................................................................................................................................169
SC8xx................................................................................................................................................172
SC9xx................................................................................................................................................187
Electrical Component Defects.......................................................................................................................190
Sensor/Switch...........................................................................................................................................190
Blown Fuse Conditions..............................................................................................................................191
Card Save Function.......................................................................................................................................192
Overview....................................................................................................................................................192
Card Save:........................................................................................................................................192
Procedure...................................................................................................................................................192
Error Messages.................................................................................................................................194
Fax Troubleshooting Guide..........................................................................................................................195
7. Energy Saving
Energy Save...................................................................................................................................................197
Energy Saver Modes................................................................................................................................197
Timer Settings....................................................................................................................................197
Recommendation..............................................................................................................................198
Energy Save Effectiveness........................................................................................................................198
Paper Save.....................................................................................................................................................200
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function............................................................................................200
1. Duplex:..........................................................................................................................................200
2. Combine mode:............................................................................................................................200
3. Duplex + Combine:......................................................................................................................200
Recommendation..............................................................................................................................201
11
Model S-C5......................................................................................................................................201
12
Specifications
See "Appendices" for the following information:
• General Specifications
• Supported Paper Sizes
13
Machine Configuration
Mainframe
Standard Component Machine Code Remarks
1 Copier [A] D127/D128 -
Standard expect for EU

2 ARDF [C] D606
Option for EU
3 Platen Cover D607 Standard for EU
Standard only for D128

4 Fax Unit [D] D655
Option only for D127
Optional Components Machine Code Remarks
Two units can be added at

5 500-sheet Paper Feed Unit [B] D661
maximum.
14
Machine Configuration
6 Handset [F] D645 NA only
System Components
Item Machine Code Remarks
Controller Box - [A] Standard
SD card for the Printer/Scanner Unit

Printer/Scanner unit D468 [B]
Standard
FAX Option D655 [F]
FAX Connection Unit D660 [B]
Browser Unit D656 [B]
VM Card D656 [C] In SD slot 2 (lower)
Net Ware D659 [C] SD Card for Net Ware printing Type 1
15
IEEE 1284 B679 [D]

One from the two
Gigabit Ethernet Board G874 [D]
Optional HDD with Interface board

HDD D659 [E] Merge the Security Card into the Printer/
Scanner SD card.
16
Overview
Overview
Component Layout
Mainframe
1. Exposure Glass 17. Bypass Tray
2. LED Unit 18. Bypass Paper End Sensor
3. Platen Cover Sensor 19. Bypass Friction Pad
4. Exit Roller 20. Registration Roller
5. Hot Roller 21. Registration Sensor
6. Exit Sensor 22. (Main) Friction Pad
7. Pressure Roller 23. Paper Feed Roller
17
8. Scanner Motor 24. Paper End Sensor
9. Cleaning Web Roller 25. TD (Toner Density) Sensor
10. Toner Collection Coil 26. Bottom Plate
11. Cleaning Blade 27. Polygon Mirror Motor
12. OPC drum 28. Laser Unit
13. Discharge Plate 29. Mixing Augers
14. Transfer Roller 30. Development Roller
15. ID (Image Density) Sensor 31. Toner Supply Bottle
16. Bypass Paper Feed Roller 32. Scanner HP Sensor
ARDF
1. Pull-out Roller 10. Registration Roller
2. Feed Roller 11. Registration Sensor
3. Friction Pad 12. Scanner Guide
4. Paper Stopper 13. ARDF drive motor
5. Pick-up Roller 14. Exit Roller
6. Original Set Feeler 15. Junction Gate
7. Original Set Sensor 16. Inverter Roller
8. Upper Cover Sensor 17. Platen Sheet
9. Original Set Tray
18
Overview
Electrical Components
Electrical Components 1
1. LED Unit 10. ID (Image Density) Sensor
2. Scanner HP Sensor 11. Registration Sensor
3. Platen Cover Sensor 12. Paper End Sensor
4. Scanner Motor 13. Toner Density Sensor
5. High-Voltage Power Supply Board 14. Bypass Paper End Sensor
6. Operation Panel Board 15. Right Door Safety Switch
7. Polygon Mirror Motor 16. Front Door Safety Switch
8. LD Unit 17. Quenching Lamp
9. Exit Sensor
19
Electrical Components 2
1. Duplex Motor 7. Paper Feed Clutch
2. Exhaust Fan 8. Toner Supply Motor
3. PSU 9. Bypass Feed Clutch
4. Controller Board 10. Registration Clutch
5. BICU 11. Fusing Solenoid
6. Main Motor
20
Overview
ARDF
1. Registration Sensor 5. Upper Cover Sensor
2. ARDF Drive Motor 6. Junction Gate Solenoid
3. Pick-up Solenoid 7. ARDF Relay Board
4. Original Set Sensor
21
Paper Path
1. Original Registration Sensor (Document Feeder)
2. Original Set Sensor (Document Feeder)
3. Upper Cover Sensor (Document Feeder)
4. Exit Sensor
5. Paper Path Sensor
6. Registration Sensor
7. By-pass Paper End Sensor
8. Paper Feed Sensor (Optional Tray)
9. Paper End Sensor (Optional Tray)
10. Paper End Sensor
22
Overview
Drive Layout
Mainframe
1. Scanner Motor 7. Bypass Feed Clutch
2. Duplex motor 8. Registration Clutch
3. Exit Roller 9. Developer Driver Gear
4. Toner Supply Motor 10. Drum Drive Gear
5. Main Motor 11. One-way Gear (Duplex Unit)
6. Paper Feed Clutch 12. Fusing Drive Gear
23
ARDF
1. DF Feed Clutch 5. DF Feed Motor

2. Feed Roller 6. Registration Roller
3. Pick-up Roller 7. Pull-out Roller
4. Inverter Roller 8. Exit Roller
• DF Feed Motor [5]: Drives the feed, pull-out, pick-up, and registration and inverter rollers.
24
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with Predecessor Products
Guidance for Those Who are Familiar with

Predecessor Products
The D127/D128 range of machines is the successor model to the D115/D116 range of machines. If
you have experience with the predecessor line, the following information may be of help when you read
this manual.
Differences from Predecessor Products
D127/D128 D115/D116
Security Card (HDD

Encryption and Data Standard Standard only for D115
Overwrite Security Unit)
30cpm: Memory copy 20cpm: Memory copy

Copying Speed
30cpm: ADF 1 to 1 16cpm: ADF 1 to 1
• The following parts are unique for D127/D128. When replacing the following parts, use the parts
specified for each model. DO NOT mix up the following parts for D115/D116 and D127/D128.
Otherwise, both of the machine operation and output quality are not guaranteed.
1. LED Scanning Unit (Scanner Unit)
2. Laser Unit (Writing Unit)
3. ARDF
4. Pressing Roller (Fusing Unit)
5. Toner Bottle (Toner Supply Unit)
6. Operation Panel
7. Bank Unit Motor (Optional Bank Unit)
8. One Chip Microcomputer (Engine Control)
25
26
2. Installation
Installation Cautions
• Before installing an optional unit, do the following:

• Print out all messages stored in the memory, all user-programmed items, and a system parameter
list.
• If there is a printer option on the machine, print out all data in the printer buffer.
• Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network cable.
27
2. Installation
Installation Requirements
Environment
–Temperature and Humidity Chart–
• Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

• Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
• Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (Do not expose to direct sunlight.)
• Ventilation: Room air should turn over at least 3 times/hr/person
• Ambient Dust: Less than 0.1 mg/m3
• Do not install the machine where it will be exposed to direct sunlight or to direct airflow (from a fan,
air conditioner, air cleaner, etc.).
• Do not install the machine where it will be exposed to corrosive gas.
• Place the machine on a firm and level base.
• Do not install the machine where it may be subjected to strong vibration.
• Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level.
28
Installation Requirements
Machine Level
Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Minimum Operational Space Requirements
Place the machine near the power source, providing clearance as shown.
A: Front – 750 mm (29.6")

B: Left – 100 mm (3.9")
C: Rear – 100 mm (3.9")
D: Right – 100 mm (3.9")
E: Depth – 450 mm (17.7")
F: Width – 476 mm (19.1")
29
2. Installation
• The 750-mm front space indicated above is sufficient to allow the paper tray to be pulled out.
Additional space is required to allow an operator to stand at the front of the machine.
• Actual minimum space requirement for left, rear, and right sides is 10mm (0.4") each, but note that
this will not allow room for opening of the bypass tray, right door or ARDF unit.
Power Requirements
• Make sure that the wall outlet is near the machine and easily accessible. After completing
installation, make sure the plug fits firmly into the outlet.
• Avoid multiple connections to the same power outlet.
• Be sure to ground the machine.
Input voltage:
North America: 120 – 127 V, 60 Hz, 15 A
Europe: 220 – 240 V, 50/60 Hz, 10 A
Image quality guaranteed at rated voltage ± 10%.

Operation guaranteed at rated voltage ± 15%.
30
Copier
Copier
Accessory Check
Printer/Scanner (D127)/ Scanner and Fax Model (D128)
Description Q'ty
Operating Instructions – Book (-17, -29) 1 set
Operating Instructions – CD ROM (-17, -29) 1
Handset Bracket (-17) 1
Modular Cable (-17) 1
EMC Caution Sheet (-27) 1
EULA Sheet (-27) 1
Caution Sheet (-27) 1
Operation Panel Key Name Sign (-17,-21,-27,-29) 1
PFU Size And Drawer Num Decal (-17,-21,-27,-29) 1
FAX Masking Decal (D12727,D12729) 1
Printer/Scanner Accessories (-17,-21,-27,-29) 1 set
Power Supply Cord (-17,-21,-27,-29) 1
Installation Procedure Book (-17,-27,-29) 1
Quick Guide (-17,-29) 1
Machine Num Decal (-17,-21,-27,-29) 1
Under Communication Sign Decal (-27) 1
Installation Procedure
• Make sure that the copier remains unplugged during installation.
31
2. Installation
1. Remove the all strips of tape.

2. Remove the bag, SMC, padding [A] and A3 sheet of paper [B] on the exposure glass.
3. Fold the SMC and put it in the back of the front door.
• Power supply cord is attached on the back of the main machine.

4. Open the front door [D].
5. Lift lever [E], press in on latch [F] and pull the bottle holder [G] out. (You do not need to pull it
completely out of the machine.)
6. Take a new bottle of toner, and shake it several times.
32
Copier
7. Remove the outer cap [H].
• Do not remove the inner cap [I].

8. Load the bottle on the holder.
• Do not forcefully turn the toner bottle on the holder. After you turn on the main power switch, the
copier sets the bottle in place.
9. Push the bottle holder back into the machine.
10. Press the latch [J] down to lock the holder.
11. Remove the tapes [K].

12. Remove the padding [L].
33
2. Installation
13. Pull each tabbed strip [M] out of the PCU with one hand, supporting the PCU with the other.
• Do not pull both strips at the same time, as this could damage the PCU.
14. Close the front door.
15. Pull out the paper tray, and remove the tape securing the end fence in the compartment.
16. Push the bottom plate down, and then load the paper.
17. Adjust the side fences. If you load paper shorter than A4, set the end fence in the correct position.
18. Push the tray back into the copier.
19. Attach the appropriate tray number decal and paper-size decal to the paper tray [N].
20. Install optional units (if any).
34
Copier
21. Attach the ferrite core [O] to the end of the network cable [P] when connecting the cable.
22. Attach the ferrite core to the telephone line in the same manner as step 21.
23. Connect the telephone line to the "LINE" jack.
• The end of the ferrite core must be about 9 cm (3.6") from the end of the cable. (EU, AP, CHN)
24. Plug in the machine and turn on the main power switch [Q].
25. Select the language used in the operation panel as necessary ( > Language).
Interface settings
1. Start the SP mode.
2. Select SP5-985-001 (NIC setting) and change the setting value to "1" (ON).
3. Select SP5-985-002 (USB setting) and change the setting value to "1" (ON).
4. Turn the main switch off and on.
Copier settings
1. Start the SP mode.
RTB 49 2. Select SP5-801-001 and execute the initialization.
SP2-801-1
3. Exit the SP mode, and then start the UP mode.
4. Select the "@Remote Service" ("User Tool" > "System Settings > Administrator Tools" > "Extended
Security" > @Remote Service") and select "Do not Prohibit".
5. Exit the UP mode, and then start the SP mode.
35
2. Installation
6. Select SP5-907-001 and specify the "Plug & Play".

7. Select SP5-302-002 and specify the time zone.
8. Select SP5-307-001, 003, and 004 and specify the daylight-saving-time settings.
9. Exit the SP mode and turn the main switch off and on.
10. Start the UP mode.
11. Specify the date and time with "Set Date" or "Set Time" (User Tool" > "System Settings" > "Timer
Settings" > "Set Date" or "Set Time").
13. Check the operations.
14. Make a full size copy, and check if the side-to-side and leading edge registrations are correct. If
they are not, adjust the registrations.
Fax Settings
Initializing the Fax unit
When you press the Fax key for the first time after installation, the error "SRAM problem occurred /
SRAM was formatted" will show on the LCD for initializing the program of the fax unit. Turn the main
power switch off/on to clear the error display.
• If another error occurs after initialization, this can be a functional problem.

1. Select fax SP1-101-016 and specify the country code.
2. Select fax SP3-101-001 and specify the service station.
Optional Handset
Accessory Check
Check that you have the components and accessories.
No. Description Q'ty
1 Handset 1
2 Handset cradle 1
3 Screws 2
4 Handset curly cord with core 1
36
Copier
5 Handset bracket 1
1. Make two holes [A] through which the screws fasten the handset bracket to the main machine. (Just
penetrate with a screw driver)
• You should detach the tray cover and make holes on it. Or you might damage the PSU.
37
2. Installation
2. Attach the handset bracket [B] to the side of the tray cover. ( x 2)
3. Remove the label from the handset cradle [C].
4. Attach the cradle [C] to the handset bracket ( x 2).
5. Reattach the label.
6. Set the handset on the cradle.
7. Connect the core attached handset cable to the "TEL" jack.
38
Paper Tray Unit (D661)

Accessory Check
Confirm that you have these accessories.
Description Q'ty
1. Paper-size decals 1 sheet
2. Installation Procedure (for service person) 1
• 1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord before you start the installation
procedure.
• 2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highly unstable when lifted by one
person, and may cause human injury or property damage.
• 3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle and grips may be damaged.
1. Remove the tapes [A].
39
2. Installation
2. Pull the paper tray part way out of the unit, remove the tape and cardboard [A], and push the tray
back in.
3. Set the copier onto the paper tray unit.
• When installing a second paper tray unit, place on the first paper tray unit before placing the
copier onto the pair of paper tray units.
4. Remove the paper tray(s) from the paper tray unit(s).
5. Load paper into the paper tray(s). Adjust the side and end fences as necessary. If loading 81/2"x
14" paper, remove the end fence and set it into the special compartment.
6. Set the paper tray(s) back into the paper tray unit(s).
40
7. Stick on the appropriate tray-number decal(s) and paper-size decal(s), at the locations indicated in
the illustration.
41
2. Installation
Paper Tray Unit Heater

The paper tray unit heater is installed in different place depending on the number of installed paper tray
units (Two units can be installed at a maximum).
• The operation system doesn't work when more than three of the paper tray units are installed.
Accessory Check
Confirm that you have the accessories listed below.
Description Q'ty RTB 50

Addiitonal information
1. Heater fastening screw 2
2. Grounding wire and Harness cover fastening screw 7
3. Washer 7
4. Spring washer 7
5. Joint bracket fastening screw 8
6. Clamp (Large) 2
7. Clamp (Mid) 5
8. Clamp (Small) 2
42
Description Q'ty
9. Edge saddle 1
10. Joint bracket (Front) 4
11. Joint bracket (Rear) 2
12. Heater Harness (Long) 1
13. Heater Harness (Mid) 1
14. Heater Harness (short) 1
15. Grounding wire (Long) 1
16. Grounding wire (Short) 1
17. Harness cover 1
18. Guard 1
19. Heater bracket (NA:Blue, EU:Red) 1
20. High temperature caution decal 1
Installation Procedure (For one of PTU installed machine)
• Unplug the main machine's power cord before starting the following procedure.
43
2. Installation
1. Remove the paper tray unit from the copier if it is already installed.
2. Remove the rear cover [1] from the paper tray unit ( x 2).
• Right screw on the picture is a shoulder screw.
3. Fasten the heater [2] ( x 2).

4. Put the clamps (Small) [3] in the holes
5. Joint the connector [4] to the heater harness (Short) [5].
6. Pass the heater harness (Short) [5] through the hole [6].
7. Attach the heater harness (Short) through the clamps as shown.
44
8. Attach the harness cover [7] ( x 2, Washer x 2, Spring Washer x 2).
9. Remove the rear cover [8] ( x 5) and the copy tray [9] ( x 1)
45
2. Installation
10. Remove the controller box [10] ( x 2, x 6).
11. Remove the support bracket [11] ( x 3).
46
12. Attach the heater harness (Long) [12] to the connector [13] on the board.
13. Attach the clamp (Large) [14]
14. Lead the heater harness (Long) [12] through the clamp (Large) [14] toward inner side of the copier
as shown.
15. Attach the clamp (Large) [15].

16. Pass the heater harness through the hole [16] to the rear of the copier.
17. Attach the grounding wire (Long) [17] ( x 1, Washer x1, Spring washer x1).
18. Pass the grounding wire (Long) [17] through the hole [16] to the rear of the copier.
19. Mount the copier on the paper tray unit [18].

20. Put the heater harness (Long) in the hole [19].
47
2. Installation
• Be sure to put the heater harness (Long) in the hole on keeping the end of the heater harness (Long)
horizontally long. This makes insertion easy.
21. Pass the support bracket between the copier and the heater harness (Long) on keeping the end of
the heater harness (Long) in the hole.
• To do step 21 easily, be sure not to pass the heater harness (Long) completely thorough the hole
[19] at the step of 20.
22. Attach the edge saddle [20] to the support bracket.
23. Attach the heater harness (Long) and the grounding wire (Long) through the edge saddle as shown.
24. Pass the grounding wire (Long) through the hole.
25. Pull the heater harness (Long) and the grounding wire (Long) to the paper tray unit side.
26. Attach the grounding wire (Long) [21] ( x 1, Washer x1, Spring washer x1)
27. Attach two of the clamps (Mid) [22] [23].
28. Attach the clamp (Mid) [24].
29. Connect the heater harness (Long) to the heater harness (Short).
30. Attach the heater harness through the clamps as shown.
• Be sure to make the bind attached on the heater harness upper than the clamp (Mid) [22] [24].
48
31. Remove the drawer from the paper tray unit.

32. Attach the caution decal [25] in the bottom of the paper tray unit.
33. Reassemble the copier.
34. Plug in the power cord, and check the operation.
Installation Procedure (For two of PTU installed machine)
• Unplug the main machine's power cord before starting the following procedure.
1. Remove the upper and the lower paper tray unit from the copier if it is already installed.
2. Remove the rear cover [1] from two of the paper tray units ( x 4).
49
2. Installation
• Right screw on the picture is a shoulder screw.
3. Attach the heater [2] to the lower paper tray unit ( x 2).
4. Put the clamps (Small) [3] in the holes.
5. Joint the connector [4] to the heater harness (Mid) [5].
6. Pass the heater harness (Mid) [5] through the hole [6].
7. Attach the heater harness (Mid) through the clamps as shown.
8. Attach the harness cover [7]. ( x 2, Washer x 2, Spring Washer x 2)
50
9. Attach the guard [8] to the top face of the upper paper tray unit. ( x 1, Washer x 1, Spring
Washer x 1)
10. Remove the rear cover [9] ( x 5) and the copy tray [10] ( x 1).
51
2. Installation
11. Remove the controller box [11] ( x 2, x 6).
12. Remove the support bracket [12] ( x 3).
52
13. Attach the heater harness (Long) [13] to the connector [14] on the board.
14. Attach the clamp (Large) [15]
15. Lead the heater harness (Long) [13] through the clamp (Large) [15] toward inner side of the copier
as shown.
16. Attach the clamp (Large) [16].

17. Pass the heater harness through the hole [17] to the rear of the copier.
18. Attach the grounding wire (Long) [18] ( x 1, Washer x1, Spring washer x1)
19. Pass the grounding wire (Long) [18] through the hole [17] to the rear of the copier.
20. Mount the copier on two of the paper tray units [19].
21. Put the heater harness (Long) in the hole [20].
53
2. Installation
• Be sure to put the heater harness (Long) in the hole on keeping the end of the heater harness (Long)
horizontally long. This makes insertion easy.
22. Pass the support bracket between the copier and the heater harness (Long) on keeping the end of
the heater harness (Long) in the hole.
• To do step 22 easily, be sure not to pass the heater harness (Long) completely thorough the hole
[20] at the step of 21.
23. Attach the edge saddle [21] to the support bracket.
24. Attach the heater harness (Long) and the grounding wire (Long) through the edge saddle as shown.
25. Pass the grounding wire (Long) through the hole.
26. Pull the heater harness (Long) and the grounding wire (Long) to the paper tray unit side.
27. Remove the hole cover [22] of the upper paper tray unit. ( x 1)
54
28. Attach the grounding wire (Long) [23] ( x 1, Washer x1, Spring washer x1).
29. Attach the grounding wire (Short) between [24] to [25] through the hole. ( x 2, Washer x2,
Spring washer x2).
30. Attach three of the clamps (Mid) [26] [27] [28].
31. Attach the clamp (Mid) [29] [30].
32. Connect the heater harness (Long) to the heater harness (Mid).
33. Attach the heater harness through the clamps as shown.
• Be sure to make the bind attached on the heater harness upper than the clamp (Mid) [29] [30].
34. Remove the drawer from the lower paper tray unit.
35. Attach the caution decal [31] in the bottom of the lower paper tray unit as shown.
36. Reassemble the copier.
55
2. Installation
37. Plug in the power cord, and check the operation.
Joint bracket (Joint the copier and the upper PTU)
1. Remove each of the drawers.

2. Insert the joint bracket (Front) [1] into the slot as the arrow shows and fasten ( x 2)
3. Attach the joint bracket (Rear) [2] as shown. ( x 2)
• The red arrow on the picture above shows the convex side of the screw hole. This is the important
clue to attach the bracket correctly.
56
Joint bracket (Joint the upper and the lower PTU)
1. Attach the joint bracket (Front) [1] as shown. ( x 2)
2. Attach the joint bracket (Rear) [2] as shown. ( x 2)
• The red arrow on the picture above shows the convex side of the screw hole. This is the important
clue to attach the bracket correctly.
57
2. Installation
Controller Options
Overview
This machine has I/F card slots and SD card slots for optional I/F connections and applications.
I/F Card Slot

• Slot [A] is used for one of the optional I/F connections: (IEEE1284, IEEE802.11a/g (Wireless
LAN) or Gigabit Ethernet).
SD Card Slot
• Slot [1] is used for options provided on SD cards. The application SD card (Printer/Scanner or
Security Card) should be installed in Slot 1. If more than one application is to be used, move the
applications to the same SD card with SP5873.
• Slot [2] is used for options provided on SD cards and servicing. The VM card must be installed in
Slot 2.
Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11a/g) Installation
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below.
58
Controller Options
1 Wireless Adapter 1
2 Wireless LAN Card 1
3 LAN Card Cover 1
4 Caution Sheet 1
5 Label 1
1. Remove the interface cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the Wireless adaptor into I/F slot [B] ( x 2).
3. Install the Wireless LAN card in the wireless adaptor.
4. Attach the antenna cap to the wireless LAN card.
5. Turn on the main power switch.
6. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/Counter > Printer Features > List/Test Print), and then
check that this device is detected.
If reception is poor, you may need to move the machine:
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that could
generate a strong magnetic field.
• Position the machine as close as possible to the access point.
59
2. Installation
SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g Wireless LAN

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 802.11a/g
SP No. Name Function
5840 004 SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for the

5840 006 Channel MAX
country.
Sets the minimum range of the channel settings allowed for

5840 007 Channel MIN
your country.
5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
IEEE 1284 Installation
• Unplug the machine power cord before starting the following procedure.
Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below.
1 IEEE1284 Interface Ass'y 1
2 UL Sheet 1
3 Caution Sheet 1
60
Controller Options

2. Install the IEEE 1284 board into I/F slot [B] ( x 2).
4. Print out the configuration page (User Tools/Counter > Printer Features > List/Test Print), and then
check that this device is detected.
VM Card Type S (D656)
Accessories
Check the accessories and their quantities against the table below.Accessories
1 VM SD Card 1
2 Decal 1
61
2. Installation
Installation
2. Switch the machine off.

3. Insert the SD card [A] into SD Slot 2 (lower).
• This SD card must be inserted into Slot 2, the lower slot.
Gigabit Ethernet
• Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following procedure.
62
Controller Options
1. Remove the I/F-slot cover [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the Gigabit Ethernet board (Knob-screw x 2) into the I/F-slot [B].
3. Attach one ferrite core [A] to the end of the Ethernet interface cable, and then attach the other
ferrite core [B] about 10cm from the end of the Ethernet interface cable.
4. Connect the Ethernet interface cable to the Gigabit Ethernet port.
Make sure that the machine can recognize this option (see 'Check All Connections' at the end of this
section).
Fax Option (D655)
Fax Unit is option for D127 but standard for D128.

The bracket on which Fax Unit is mounted is embedded in the controller box.
63
2. Installation
Component Check
1 Fax Unit 1
2 Speaker 1
3 Insulating Sheet 1
4 Screw for Fax Unit 4
5 Screw (thin) for Speaker 2
6 Screw (thick) for Grounding Wire 2
7 Harness with Band 1
8 Ferrite Core (EU/AP/CN) 1
9 Decal (Super G3) 1
10 Grounding Wire 2
11 Bracket Guide 1
12 Core attached Telephone Cord (NA only) 1
13 Ferrite Core 1
64
Controller Options
1. Rear cover ( x 5)
2. Attach the Fax Unit [A] to the bracket [B] with placing the sheet [C] between the unit [A] and the
bracket [B]. ( x 4)
3. Attach the Bracket Guide [D] as shown.
4. Slot the bracket assembled in procedure 2 in between two of the guides as the blue arrow shows.
5. Attach the large end of the Harness with the Band [E] and connect the small end to on the Fax Unit [A]
as the red arrows shows.
6. Attach the Speaker [F] and its connector to the large end of the Harness [E].
7. Attach the ferrite core [A] on the speaker harness within 50mm from the end of the controller board.
This prevents the harness from being involved in the fan [B].
65
2. Installation
RTB 27
Jumper setting for Brazil
Grounding Wire
Attach the grounding wire as shown.

[A] and [B] are attached with screws (thick) for the grounding wire.
[C] and [D] are with screws for the controller board cover.
• Be sure to make [A], [B] and [C] attached in upward direction.
HDD Option (D659)
Component Check
1 HDD Unit 1
2 Screw 6
3 SAT Interface Board 1
4 Cable (Small) 1
5 Cable (Large) 1
66
Controller Options
1. Open the right door [A].

2. Interface cover [B] ( x 1)
3. Rear cover [C] ( x 5)
67
2. Installation
4. Controller box cover [A] ( x 11)
5. Remove three of the screws and pull the bracket as the arrow shows to detach the board [A].
68
Controller Options
6. Connect the HDD Unit [B] and SAT Interface Board [C] with the Cable (small) and the Cable (large).
7. Install the HDD Unit [B] and the SAT Interface Board [C] in the controller board ( x 5).
• Be sure to lead two of the cables over the HDD bracket to the SAT interface board [C]. This makes
installation easy.
8. Reinstall the controller box cover and rear cover in the machine.
Turn the main power switch on.
9. Touch the “Format” button displayed with the message on start-up.
10. Turn the main power switch off/on after the message directs to do so.
Installing the Security Card

1. Insert the Security Card in the SD slot.
• For D127, use slot 2 (lower) and merge the Security Card into the Printer/Scanner card with
SP5-873-001. Remove the Security Card from the SD slot 2 after moving the security
applications and keep the Security Card at a safe location.
• For D128, use slot 1 (upper).
2. Enter the SP mode.
3. Input a machine serial number with SP 5811-001.
4. Go into the SP mode and push "EXECUTE" with SP5-878-001.
5. Select SP5878-002, and then press "Execute" on the LCD.
6. Exit the SP mode after "Completed" is displayed on the LCD.
69
2. Installation
Activating the Security Applications

1. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
• Supervisor login password
• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be changed
before you do the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that "Admin. Authentication" is ON.
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Admin.
Authentication]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before you do the installation
procedure.
3. Make sure that "Administrator Tools" is enabled (selected).
[System Settings] – [Administrator Tools] – [Administrator Authentication Management] - [Available
Settings]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled (selected)
before you do the installation procedure.
4. Refer to the Security Reference for details about activating the security applications (HDD
Encryption Unit and DataOverwriteSecurity).
HDD Encryption Recovery from a Device Problem

The flowchart below shows the recovery possibility of the HDD encryption if one of devices related with
the HDD encryption is defective.
70
Controller Options
Restoring the Encryption key

When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed,
updating the encryption key is required.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Ask an administrator to input the encryption key (this has been printed out earlier by the user) into
the "nvram_key.txt" file.
5. Remove only the HDD unit.
7. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption key) in the
machine.
8. Turn off the main power switch.
9. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into slot 1.
10. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the
flash memory on the controller board.
11. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
12. Remove the SD card from slot 1.
13. Reinstall the HDD unit.
Clearing the NVRAM

When replacing the controller board for a model in which the HDD encryption unit has been installed
and a customer has lost the encryption key, clearing the NVRAM is required to recover the HDD
encryption unit.
1. Prepare an SD card which is initialized.
2. Make the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
3. Make an "nvram_key.txt" file in the "restore_key" folder in the SD card.
4. Input "nvclear" into the "nvram_key.txt" file.
6. Confirm that the prompt on the LCD tells you to install the SD card (storing the encryption key) in the
machine.
8. Insert the SD card that contains "nvclear" into slot 1.
9. Turn on the main power switch, and the machine automatically restores the encryption key in the
flash memory on the controller board.
71
2. Installation
10. Turn off the main power switch after the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from slot 1.
13. Initialize the NVRAM (SP5801-001) and HDD unit (SP5832-001) with SP mode.
14. The user must enable the HDD encryption unit with a user tool.
72
Maintenance Tables
• PM tables
73
How to Clear the PM Counter

Reset the PM counter after your maintenance work.
1. Activate the SP mode.

2. Select SP7-804-001.
3. Press the EXECUTE. The message "Completed" is displayed when the program ends normally. An
error message is displayed if the program ends abnormally.
4. Press the Exit to end the program.
74
Precautions
General
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before starting replacement.
Before turning off the main power switch, check that no mechanical component is operating.
Mechanical components may stop out of their home positions if you turn off the main power switch while
they are operating. The component may be damaged if you try to remove it when it is not in the home
position.
Lithium Batteries
• Incorrect replacement of lithium battery(s) on the controller or on the fax unit poses risk of
explosion. Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the
Halogen-free Cable
• Use extreme caution while handling cables.
To comply with local regulations, halogen-free cables are used in this machine. Halogen-free cables are
environment-friendly, but no stronger than conventional cables. These cables may be damaged in any
of the following cases:
• The cable is caught between hard objects such as brackets, screws, PCBs, and exterior covers.
• The cable is rubbed on a hard object such as brackets, screws, PCBs, and exterior covers.
• The cable is scratched with a hard object such as brackets, screws, PCBs, exterior covers,
screwdrivers, and fingernails.
75
Static Electricity
Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you handle SD
cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
76
Special Tools and Lubricants
Special Tools and Lubricants

Part Number Description Q'ty
B6455010 SD Card 1
52039502 Silicon Grease G-501 1
B6795100 Plug-IEEE1284 Type C 1
77
Exterior Covers and Operation Panel

Rear Cover

2. Interface cover [B] ( x 1)
4. Rear cover [C] ( x 5)
Copy Tray
• Make sure that the cables under the copy tray are in place before reassembling the copier. If these
cables are caught between the copy tray and the inner cover, they may be severely damaged.
78
1. Open the front door [A].

2. Copy tray [B] ( x1)
Operation Panel
1. Remove the Scanner front cover [A].(Hook)

2. Remove the Right front cover [B].(Hook)
79
3. Remove the screws and the harnesses showed above for detaching the scanner unit.
4. Scanner unit [C] ( x 5, x 4)

5. Operation panel [D] ( x 5, x 2)
80
Right Door

2. Release the strap [B].
3. Open the door fully and pull out.
4. Right door ( x 1)
Bypass Tray
1. Press the stopper rails [A] inward.

2. Pull out with pressing the rails.
3. Bypass Tray (Hook)
81
Platen Cover and ARDF Sensor
1. Scanner Cover ( p.83 " Scanner Cover and Exposure Glass")

2. Platen cover sensor [A] ( x 1, hook)
82
Scanner Unit
Scanner Unit
To clean the mirrors and lenses, use a blower brush or wet cotton.
Scanner Cover and Exposure Glass
Exposure glass is united with Scanner cover.

To clean the exposure glass, use alcohol or glass cleaner.
1. Platen cover or ARDF ( p.122 "ARDF Unit")

2. Scanner front cover [A] (Hook)
• The front scanner cover is attached by 2 of the hooks the picture [1] shows. Pulling the cover
downward to keep the hooks off while removing, makes detaching easy.
3. Scanner cover [B] ( x 7, Hook)
LED Unit
• Do not disassemble the LED Unit. The LED Unit is precision adjusted before shipment.
• Do not touch the screws on the CCD. The CCD is precision adjusted before shipment.
• Do not wipe the oil coated on the guide rod off. The oil doesn't exist in service parts.
83
1. Scanner Cover and Exposure Glass ( p.83 " Scanner Cover and Exposure Glass")
2. Remove the long bracket [A] and the guide rod bracket [B]. ( x 4)
3. Lift the guide rod [C] as the red arrow shows.
4. Put the belt [D] off as blue arrow shows to release the LED Unit [E] from the guide rod.
• Do not loosen the paint-locked screws holding the lens in place.

• After installing a new lens, carry out copy adjustments ( p.134 "Adjusting Copy Image
Area").
Scanner Motor
84
Scanner Unit
1. Push the spring [A] located on the opposite side of the scanner motor [B] to loosen the belt [C] from
the scanner motor gear.
2. Remove the screws on the top of the scanner motor [B] ( x 4).
3. Turn the scanner motor [B] back. Then remove the screws and the harness on the back ( x2
x1).
Scanner HP Sensor
1. Rear cover ( p.78 "Rear Cover")

2. Scanner Cover and Exposure Glass ( Scanner Cover and Exposure Glass)
3. Two of the brackets [A] [B] and the rail [C] ( x 6)
4. Scanner HP sensor [D] ( x 1, x 1)
85
Fusing
Fusing Unit
• Before handling the fusing unit, make sure that the unit is cool enough. The fusing unit can be very
hot.
1. Copy tray ( p.78 "Copy Tray")

2. Open the right door.
3. Connector cover [A] ( x 1)
• When reinstalling, attach the ground wire.

4. Fusing unit [B] ( x 2, x 4)
86
Fusing
Exit Sensor
1. Fusing unit ( p.86 "Fusing Unit")

2. Exit sensor [A] ( x 1)
Hot Roller Stripper Pawls
• Take care not to damage the hot roller stripper pawls and the tension springs.
87
1. Fusing unit ( p.86 "Fusing Unit")

2. Separate the fusing unit into two sections: the hot roller section [A] and the pressure roller section
[B] ( x 2).
After removing the screws, lower the pressure roller section about halfway and then slide it toward
the front side to detach it.
3. Support rollers [C]
4. Hot roller stripper pawls [D]
• Remove the spacer [E] ( x 1) if you are removing the hot roller assembly ( p.88 "Hot
Roller and Fusing Lamp").
Hot Roller and Fusing Lamp
• Do not touch the fusing lamp and rollers with your bare hands.
88
Fusing
1. Hot roller stripper pawls and spacers ( p.87 "Hot Roller Stripper Pawls")
2. Hot roller assembly [A] ( x 2)
3. Fusing lamp [B]
• When reassembling, check that the direction of the fusing lamp is correct.
4. Hot roller [C] (2 C-rings, 1 spacer, 1 gear, 2 bushings, 1 cover [D])

Reassembling
Be sure that:
• The fusing lamp is positioned correctly.
• The fusing lamp does not touch the internal part of the hot roller.
89
Thermoswitches and Thermistor
1. Hot roller assembly ( p.88 "Hot Roller and Fusing Lamp")

2. Thermoswitches [A] ( x2)
3. Thermistor [B] ( x 1)
Reassembling
Make sure of the following:
• That the thermistor is in contact with the hot roller.
• That the hot roller turns smoothly.
• Do not recycle a thermoswitch that is already opened. Safety is not guaranteed if you do this.
90
Fusing
Pressure Roller
1. Separate the fusing unit into two sections ( p.87 "Hot Roller Stripper Pawls").
2. Fusing entrance guide [A] ( x 1)
3. Two springs [B][C]

4. Two pressure arms [D][E]
5. Bushing [F]
6. Pressure roller [G]
91
Fusing NIP Band Check By-pass (Checking the NIP band)
You can check the nip band to see if the fusing unit is in a good condition–especially, if the hot roller
and pressure roller are correctly installed.
1. Place an OHP sheet on the by-pass tray.
2. Activate the SP mode.
3. Select SP1-152-001.
4. The copier feeds the OHP sheet, and stops it between the hot roller and the pressure roller for
about 40 seconds.
5. Wait until the OHP sheet is output.
6. After output, quit the SP mode.
You see an opaque stripe on the OHP sheet. This is the trace of the nip band. The normal nip band is
symmetrical on the OHP sheet. Both ends are slightly thicker than the center.
• There are no specifications or standards for the nip band of this copier.
92
PCU and Quenching Lamp
PCU and Quenching Lamp

When handling the photo conductor unit (PCU), use caution:
• Do not touch the OPC drum with your bare hands. When the OPC drum is unclean, clean it with
dry cloth, or clean it with wet cotton and wipe it with dry cloth.
• Do not use alcohol or any other chemicals to clean the OPC drum. These substances damage the
OPC-drum surface.
• Keep PCUs in a cool, dry place.
• Do not expose the OPC to any corrosive gas such as ammonia.
• Do not shake a used PCU. Remaining toner and developer may spill out.
• Dispose of used PCUs in accordance with local regulations.
PCU
• The PCU may become stuck if you try to remove it while the front door is closed.
2. Open the front door.
3. Remove the toner bottle holder.
• Clean all spilled toner off the toner bottle area and the inside of the front door.
4. Pull out the PCU [A] on pushing the part as the red arrow shows. ( x 1).
93
• When reinstall the PCU, be sure to hook the PCU connector cable as shown above so as not to
damage the cable.
5. When having installed a new PCU, remove the Styrofoam and tags ( p.31 "Copier" in the chapter
"Installation").
Initialization
After replacement, Do “SP2801-001” to initialize the copier setting for PCU.
Quenching Lamp
1. PCU ( p.93 "PCU")

2. Remove the Lamp Shading [A] (Adhered)
3. Put the Quenching lamp [B] out as the blue arrow shows on pushing carefully as the red arrow
shows. ( x 1)
94
Exhaust Fan and Main Motor
Exhaust Fan and Main Motor

Exhaust Fan

2. Exhaust fan [A] ( x 2, x 1)
Main Motor

2. High-voltage power supply board ( p.114 "High-Voltage Power Supply Board ")
3. Ground plate [A] ( x 1)
95
4. Main motor with the gear cover [B] ( x 1, x 7, x 2, 2 bushings)
5. All gears [C]

6. Main motor [D] ( x 3)
Reassembling
Attach the main motor before attaching the gears.
• When you have difficulty in reattaching two of the snap rings, remove the PCU to push the axles on
the back of the main motor as the picture shows below. Then the ditches in which the snap rings
attach are pushed out.
96
Paper Feed
Paper Feed
Paper Feed Roller and Friction Pad
When handling the paper tray or the paper feed roller, use caution:
• Do not touch the surface of paper feed rollers.
• To avoid paper jams, correctly set the side and end fences in the paper tray.
1. Paper tray
2. Shaft [A] ( x 1)
3. Remove either or both of the following:
• Paper feed roller [B] as the blue arrow shows.
• Friction pad [C] as the red arrow shows.
97
Paper End Sensor
1. Draw the paper tray out from the copier.

3. Paper end sensor [A] ( x 1, Hook)
• Be sure to make the feeler be able to move up and down correctly when reattaching the Paper End
Sensor.
Registration Sensor
1. Paper tray
98
Paper Feed
3. Open the paper guide [A].
• Remove the paper guide (Clip x 1) if you have difficulty removing the registration sensor.
4. Registration sensor feeler [B]
5. Registration sensor [C] ( x 1)
• Disconnect the connector (CN127 [D]) if you have difficulty removing the registration sensor.
Bypass Paper End Sensor
1. Right door ( p.81 "Right Door")

2. Sensor compartment [A]
3. Bypass paper end sensor [B] ( x 1)
• If it is difficult to reattach the Sensor compartment, turn the feed roller housing upside down.
(Bypass Feed Roller: Procedure 2)
99
Bypass Feed Roller

2. Turn the feed roller housing upside down [A] ( x 2).
3. Feed roller shaft [B] (2 snap pawls [C], 1 spacer [D])

4. Bypass feed roller [E]
100
Paper Feed
Bypass Feed Clutch and Friction Pad

3. Disconnect the bypass feed clutch connector [A] (CN93).
4. Bypass feed roller housing [B] ( x 2)
5. Bypass feed clutch [C] ( x 1)
6. Bypass friction pad [D]
101
Paper Feed and Registration Clutches
1. Paper tray
3. Ground plate [A] ( x 1)
4. Gear cover [B] ( x 1, x 7, x 2, 2 bushings)
• Do not remove the main motor from the gear cover.
5. Ground plate [C] ( x 1)

6. Paper feed clutch [D] ( x 1, x 1)
102
Image Transfer
Image Transfer
Transfer Roller
• Do not touch the transfer roller with your bare hands.

• Do not scratch the transfer roller. The transfer roller is easily damaged.

2. Raise the levers [A],[B] at the ends of the image transfer roller.
3. Release the image transfer roller [C].
Reassembling
Make sure that the springs [D] are in the original positions.
103
ID Sensor and Duplex Roller

2. Remove the lower guide [A] by releasing the hook to lift one side of the lower guide [A] as the red
arrow shows then lift the other side.
3. Idle roller holders [B].
4. Idle roller [C]
5. Roller guide [D] ( x 2)
6. Transfer unit [F] ( x 2)
• To remove the transfer unit easily, insert a slotted screwdriver into the one side of the unit as the red
arrow shows and lift to release. Then release the other side.
104
Image Transfer
7. One-way gear [G] ( x 1)

8. Duplex roller [H] ( x 1, 3 bushings)
9. ID sensor [I] ( x 1)
• If you have difficulty removing in the way of No.1 on the picture, Put four of the hooks off in the
bottom and make space through which you can take the sensor out. But you don't need to remove
the bottom cover.
105
Discharge plate

2. Discharge plate [A] (Red arrow: Hook, Red circle: Pressed)
106
BICU and Controller Board
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the machine before starting replacement.
• Before turning off the main power switch, check that no mechanical component is operating.
Mechanical components +may stop out of their home positions if you turn off the main power
switch while they are operating. The component may be damaged if you try to remove it when it is
not in the home position.
BICU
Preparation
• Before replacing the NVRAM, be sure to save the NVRAM data.
• Saving from the BICU NVRAM to an SD card ( p.144 "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in
the "System Service Mode" of the appendices of the this manual.)
Procedure

2. Controller box [A] ( x 6, x 2)
107
3. Ground plate [B] ( x 2)

4. BICU [C] (all , 1 flat cables, x 7)
• When replacing the BICU, remove the NVRAM [D] from the board. Install the NVRAM to the
new board.
5. After replacing the NVRAM, copy the saved data to the NVRAM.
• From an SD card to the NVRAM ( p.144 "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the
"System Service Mode" of the appendices of this manual.)
Controller Board
Preparation:
• Before replacing the controller board, be sure to print out SMC or save the NVRAM data.
• Saving from the Controller NVRAM to an SD card ( p.144 "NVRAM Data Upload/Download"
in the "System Service Mode" of the appendices of this manual.)
Procedure
2. FCU ( p.117 "FCU")
108
3. Remove the printer/scanner SD card.

4. Remove I/F cover [A] (or I/F options if they have been installed) ( x 2).
5. Remove the relay connector [A] and the clamp [B].

6. Remove the ground plate [B] ( x 1).
7. Remove the controller board with the rails [C] ( x 6).
109
8. Release the hooks as the red arrows show, and then pull out the rails [A].
9. Remove the DIMM [B] if it has been installed.
• When replacing the controller board, remove the NVRAMs from the board. Install the
NVRAMs to the new board.
When installing a new controller board

1. Install the NVRAM from the old controller board on a new controller board.
2. Install the new controller board in the machine.
3. Disconnect the cables of the HDD from the controller board if the HDD option has already been
installed.
• Disconnecting the cables of the HDD is very important. Otherwise, the HDD is automatically
formatted and all data in the HDD is lost due to the security limitation.
4. Reassemble the machine.
5. Turn on the main power of the machine.
• If the HDD option has not been installed, the installation procedure is completed.
• If the HDD option has already been installed, go to next step.
6. Turn off the main power of the machine, and then connect the cables of the HDD again.
• Make sure you print out the SMC reports ("SP Mode Data" and "Logging Data") before you
replace the NVRAM.
110
• Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity can
damage NVRAM data.
• Make sure the NVRAM is correctly installed on the controller board.
When replacing the NVRAM on the controller board

1. Disconnect the cables of the HDD from the controller board.
• Disconnecting the cables of the HDD is very important. Otherwise, the HDD is automatically
formatted and all data in the HDD is lost due to the security limitation.
2. Install a New NVRAM on the controller. Then reassemble the machine.

• When you replace the NVRAM [A], make sure that the NVRAM is correctly installed.
• The mark [B] on the NVRAM should be directed to the right side (seem from the back side of
the machine).
3. Remove the Security Card or Printer/Scanner card from SD slot 1.
4. Install a new Security Card in SD slot 1.
5. Turn the main switch on.
6. SC995-02 occurs.
7. Turn the machine off.
8. Connect the cables of the HDD to the controller board.
9. Reassemble the machine, and then turn on the machine.
10. Do the process control self-check.
111
11. Do ACC for the copier application program.

12. Do ACC for the printer application program.
13. Do SP5-878-001 to install the DataOverwriteSecurity application.
14. Do SP5878-002 to install the HDD Encryption application.
15. Merge all applications in a one SD card in SD slot 1 with SP5831-001 if necessary.
16. Copy the old NVRAM data to the new NVRAM with SP5-825 or input the SMC data in the
machine. (For details, refer to the p.144 "NVRAM Data Upload/Download" in the "System
Service Mode" of the appendices of the this manual)
112
Other Replacements
Other Replacements
Duplex Motor

2. High-Voltage Power Supply Board ( p.114 "High-Voltage Power Supply Board ")
3. Main motor ( p.95 "Main Motor")
4. Exhaust Fan ( p.95 "Exhaust Fan")
5. SOL bracket ( x 4)
6. Duplex Motor Bracket ( x 4, x 3)
113
7. Duplex motor [A] ( x 2)
High-Voltage Power Supply Board

2. High-voltage power supply board [A] with the cover [B] (all , x 4)
• Remove the insulating sheet [C] if you are going to remove the contact-release solenoid ( p.
116 "Contact-Release Solenoid") or the gear cover ( p.102 "Paper Feed and Registration
Clutches").
114
Other Replacements
PSU
1. Open the front door.

2. Copy tray ( p.78 "Copy Tray")
3. PSU assembly [A] ( x 7, x 10)
4. PSU [B] ( x 8, x 7)
RTB 47
Caution: Some parts of the PSU retain charge for a long period after disconnecting the power.
See the diagrams in this RTB for details.
115
Contact-Release Solenoid

3. Contact-release solenoid [A] (1 spring, x 1)
Toner Supply Motor
1. Toner bottle holder

2. Hold both sides of the Toner Supply Clutch [A] as the red arrows show. Then pull to your side with
trying to release the upper hook the red square shows.
3. Remove the harness the red circle shows.
116
Other Replacements
FCU
Lithium Batteries
• Incorrect replacement of lithium battery(s) on the controller or on the fax unit poses risk of
explosion. Replace only with the same type or with an equivalent type recommended by the
Procedure
2. Controller box cover [A] ( x 11)
3. FCU [A] ( x 3, x 1)
117
4. When you replace the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCU board and install it
on the new FCU board.
5. Set the correct date and time with the User Tools: User Tools> System Settings> Timer Setting> Set
Date/Time
• Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).

• Do SP6-101 in the "Fax SP" to print the system parameters, and check the settings.
118
Laser Unit
Laser Unit
• Turn off the main power switch and unplug the copier before starting replacement. The laser beam
can damage your eyes severely.
• Do not touch the screws on the LD board on the LD unit. Do not try to adjust any part of the LD unit.
The LD unit is precision adjusted before shipment.
• Do not touch the polygon mirror, shield glass, or lenses with your bare hands.
Location of the Caution Decal
119
Laser Unit
1. PSU assembly ( p.115 "PSU")

2. Toner bottle holder
3. Remove 2 of the mylars (Film) sealing the holes on the bottom of the toner bottle rail.
4. Laser unit [A] ( x 3, x 2)
5. Replace the mylars (Film) with new ones.
• The mylars are necessary to seal the holes in order for the laser unit not to be tainted with toner
powder.
120
Laser Unit
LD Unit and Polygon Mirror Motor
1. Laser unit ( p.120 "Laser Unit")

2. Laser unit cover [A] ( x 2, 1 grounding plate)
3. LD unit [B] ( x 2)
4. Polygon mirror motor [C] ( x 3)
Reassembling
Check that the polygon mirror and toroidal lens are clean. Dust or other foreign substances may
interfere with the operation of the LD unit.
121
ARDF
ARDF Unit
1. Rear cover ( p.78 "Rear Cover").
2. Remove the stud screw [A].

3. Remove the ground cable [B] ( x 1).
4. Remove the clamp [C].
5. Disconnect the I/F cable [D].
122
ARDF
6. Remove the ARDF [A] from the copier as shown.
When installing the ARDF
1. Open the ARDF.

2. Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass.
3. Line up the rear left corner of the platen sheet flush against corner [B] on the exposure glass.
123
4. Close the ARDF.

5. Reopen the ARDF.
6. Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to fix it on the ARDF firmly.
ARDF Rear Cover
1. Open the ARDF left cover [A].

2. ARDF rear cover [B] ( x 1)
Original Feed Unit
1. Open the ARDF left cover ( p.124 "ARDF Rear Cover").
124
ARDF
2. Original feed unit [A]
Pick-up Roller
1. Original feed unit ( p.124 "Original Feed Unit")
2. Release the hook [A].
3. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pick-up roller [B].
Feed Roller
125
2. Remove the clip [A].
3. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pin [B].
126
ARDF
4. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the feed roller [B].
Friction Pad
2. Turn the lock lever [A] clockwise.
3. Friction pad [A] (hook x 3)
127
DFRB
1. ARDF rear cover ( p.124 "ARDF Rear Cover")
2. DFRB [A] ( x 4, hook x 1)
ARDF Top Cover Sensor/ Original Set Sensor
2. ARDF top cover sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)

3. Original set sensor [B] ( x 1, hooks)
ARDF Drive Motor
128
ARDF
2. Guide plate [A] (hook x 2)
3. Guide plate [A] ( x 5)
4. Release the clamps and disconnect the connectors ( x 3, x 2).
129
5. Holder [A] ( x 1)
6. Hinge [A] ( x 3)
7. Bracket [A] ( x 2)
130
ARDF
8. ARDF drive motor [A] ( x 2, x 1)
• Do not touch the encoder [B] when holding the motor.
White Plate
1. Open the ARDF.
2. White plate [A] (hook x 2)
131
When installing the white plate
Make sure that the mylars [A] are outside the white plate.
Registration Sensor
1. White plate ( p.131 "White Plate")
2. Registration sensor holder [A] ( x 1)
132
ARDF
3. Registration sensor [A] ( x 1, hooks)
133
Adjusting Copy Image Area

Adjust the copy image area under any of the following conditions:
1. After clearing engine data (SP5-801-001 or SP5-801-002).
2. After replacing any of the following components:
• LED unit
• Scanner motor
• Polygon mirror motor
• Paper tray
Printing
Make sure that the paper is correctly loaded in each paper tray before starting the adjustment
procedures in this section.
Adjusting Registration
Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-001 > 10) for this adjustment.
1. Print out the test pattern with the paper fed from the regular paper tray.
2. Print out the test pattern with the paper fed from the by-pass tray.
3. Print out the test pattern by selecting duplex printing.
4. Measure the distance between the leading edge of the image area and the leading edge of the
paper [A].
• The diagram shows the paper on the copy tray. Note that the paper is output with the face
down.
134
SP Specification
SP1-001-001 (All Trays) 0 ± 2 mm
SP1-001-002 (By-pass) 0 ± 2 mm
SP1-001-003 (Duplex) 0 ± 4 mm
5. Adjust the leading edge registration (SP1-001).

6. Measure the distance between the side edge of the image area and the side edge of the paper [B].
SP Specification
SP1-002-001 (1st tray) 0 ± 2 mm
SP1-002-002 (2nd tray) 0 ± 2 mm
SP1-002-003 (3rd tray) 0 ± 2 mm
SP1-002-004 (By-pass) 0 ± 4 mm
SP1-002-005 (Duplex) 0 ± 4 mm
7. Adjust the side-to-side registration (SP1-002).

8. Select "Cancel" in SP2-109-001 after finishing the adjustment procedure.
Adjusting Blank Margin

Use the Trimming Area Pattern (SP2-109-001 > 10) for this adjustment.
1. Print out the test pattern.
2. Measure the distance between the four edges of the image area and the four edges of the paper
[A][B][C][D].
135
down.
3. Adjust the blank margin (SP2-103).
SP Specification
SP2-103-001 (Leading Edge) [A] 3 +1/-3 mm
SP2-103-002 (Trailing Edge) [B] 3 +1/-3 mm
SP2-103-003 (Left Side) [C] 2 ± 2 mm
SP2-103-004 (Right Side) [D] 2 ± 2 mm
• The "Left Side" and "Right Side" comes to your left-hand side and right-hand side respectively
when you view the copied image with the leading edge upwards.
Adjusting Main-Scan Magnification

Use the Grid Pattern (Grid Vertical Line) (SP2-109-001 > 5) for this adjustment.
SP Specification
SP2-102-001 (Main scan Mag.) 0 ± 0.5%
1. Print out the test pattern.

2. Measure the sides of squares. Each side should be 2.7-mm long.)
3. Adjust the main-scan magnification (SP2-102-001: Main Scan Mag.).
Scanning
Preparation:
• Before adjusting scanning, adjust printing ( p.134 "Printing").
• To adjust scanning, use the A4 test chart.
136
Adjusting Registration
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass. Make sure that the test chart is aligned with the rear and
left scales on the exposure glass.
2. Make a copy.
3. Measure the distance between the leading edge of the image area and the leading edge of the
paper [A].
down.
4. Adjust the leading-edge scan registration. (SP4-010-001).
SP Specification
SP4-010-001 (LE Scan Regist) 0 ± 2 mm
5. Measure the distance between the side edge of the image area and the side edge of the paper [B].
6. Adjust the side-to-side registration (SP4-011-001).
SP Specification
SP4-011-001 (S-to-S Scan Regist) 0 ± 2 mm
137
Adjusting Magnification
1. Place the test chart on the exposure glass. Make sure the test chart is aligned with the rear and left
scales on the exposure glass.
2. Make a copy.
3. Compare the copy with the original.
4. Adjust the main-scan and sub-scan magnifications. The original image [A] is magnified in the main-
scan direction [B] or in the sub-scan direction [C] when you specify a larger value.
• The diagrams show the paper on the copy tray. Note that the paper is output with the face down.
SP Specification
SP2-102-001 (Main scan Mag.) 0 ± 0.5%
SP4-008-001 (Sub Scan Mag.) 0 ± 1.0%
DF Image Adjustment
• Perform the adjustment procedure in this section only when the ARDF is installed on the copier.
138
1. Make a temporary test chart as shown in the above diagram. Use the "A4/8.5 x 11" paper to
make it.
2. Place the temporary test chart on the ARDF.
3. Make a copy.
4. Measure the distance between the side edge of the image area and the side edge of the paper
[A].
(The diagram shows the paper on the copy tray. Note that the paper is output with the face down.)
5. Adjust the side-to-side registration (S to S/Front Regist: SP6-006-001, S to S/Rear Regist:
SP6-006-002). The image area moves to the rear side of the copier when you specify a larger
value.
6. Measure the distance between the leading of the image area and the leading edge of the paper
[B].
7. Adjust the leading edge registration (Leading Regist: SP6-006-003). The image area moves to the
right side of the copier when you specify a larger value.
8. Measure the distance between the trailing edge of the image area and the trailing edge of the
paper [C].
9. Adjust the erased area on the trailing edge (Trailing Erase: SP6-006-007).
10. Compare the copy with the original.
139
11. Adjust the sub-scan magnification (SP4-008-001). The specification is ±1.0%.
140
Service Program
• Do not let the user access the SP mode or the SSP mode. Only service representatives are allowed
to access these modes. The machine operation is NOT guaranteed after any person other than
service representatives accesses the SP mode.
SP Tables

• System SP Tables
• Printer SP Tables
• Scanner SP Tables
Using SP and SSP Modes
The following two modes are available:

• SP Mode (Service Program Mode): The SP Mode includes the programs that are necessary for
standard maintenance work.
• SSP Mode (Special SP Mode): The SSP Mode includes SP-Mode programs and some special
programs. You need some extra knowledge to use these special programs. For details, consult your
supervisor.
141
Starting SP Mode
For details, ask your supervisor.
Selecting Programs
• When you want to jump to the program directly, confirm the item "SP Direct" [A] selected and put
the SP number you want to operate by the keypad. Then press the "#" key [B].
• When you want to select the program in the menu, touch the signs [C] to scroll through the menu.
Then touch the item you want to operate.
Specifying Values
1. After locating a program, type the keypad to put the number in as the value. To switch between
positive (plus) and negative (minus) values, press the key.
2. Press the "#" key [B] to confirm the value or the "C" key [D] to cancel.
Activating Copy Mode

You can activate the copy mode while the SP mode is running. When you do so, the copier outputs
images or patterns that help you adjust the SP setting.
1. Press the key [E]. The copy mode is activated.
2. Specify copy settings and press the key [E].
3. To return to the SP mode, touch the item "To SP" displayed on the upper left corner on the panel.
• You cannot end the SP mode while the copy mode is activated.
Quitting Programs/Ending (S) SP Mode

Touch the item "Exit" displayed on the upper right corner on the panel to quit the program or end the SP
mode.
Conventions used in the tables:

• Asterisk (*): The settings are saved in the NVRAM. Most of them return to the default values when
you execute SP5-801-002. CTL indicates that the data is contained in NVRAM on the controller
board.
• DFU: The program is for design/factory use only. Do not change the settings.
142
Service Program
• Brackets ([ ]): The brackets enclose the setting rage, default value, and minimum step with unit
([Minimum to Maximum / Default / Step]).
143
Using SP Mode
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card

Follow this procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
1. Before switching the machine off, execute SP 5990-1 (SMC Print). You will need a record of the
NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
2. Turn off the main power of the copier.
3. Remove the interface cover ( x 1).
4. Insert the SD card into the service slot 2, then turn on the main power of the copier.
5. Execute SP 5824-1 (NVRAM Data Upload) then press the "Execute" key.
• When uploading is finished, a file is coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card. The file is
saved to the path and filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "B0700017":
NVRAM\B0700017.NV
6. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds the
uploaded (saved) data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded
(saved).
• NVRAM data from more than one machine can be uploaded (saved) to the same SD card.
7. Turn off the main power, and then remove the SD card from the slot 2.
Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Follow this procedure to download (save) SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the machine.
• If the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if the connection between the controller and
BICU is defective, the NVRAM data download may fail.
• If the download fails, repeat the download procedure.
144
Using SP Mode
• If the second attempt fails, enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created
before uploading the NVRAM data. ( above procedure)
1. Turn off the main power of the copier.
2. Remove the interface cover 2 ( x 1).
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into the service slot 2.
4. Turn on the main power of the copier.
5. Execute SP 5825-1 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the "Execute" key.
6. Turn off the main power of the copier, and then remove the SD card from the slot 2.
• In order for the NVRAM data to download successfully, the serial number of the file on the SD
card must match the serial number of the machine. If the serial numbers do not match, the
download will fail.
This procedure downloads (saves) the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count
Firmware Update Procedure
This section illustrates how to update the firmware.

To update the firmware, you must have the new version of the firmware downloaded onto an SD
(Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted into the uppermost slot on the right side of the controller
box, viewed from the back of the machine.
Before You Begin…

An SD card is a precision device, so always observe the following precautions when handling SD cards:
• Always switch the machine off before inserting an SD card. Never insert the SD card into the slot
with the power on.
• When the power is switched on, never remove the SD card from the service slot.
• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SD card.
• Store SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed high temperature, high humidity, or
exposure to direct sunlight.
• Always handle SD cards with care to avoid bending or scratching them. Never drop an SD card or
expose it to other shock or vibration.
Keep the following points in mind while you are using the firmware update software:
145
• "Upload" means to send data from the machine to the SD card, and "download" means to send
data from the SD card to the machine.
• To select an item on the LCD screen, press the appropriate key on the operation panel, or press the
appropriate number key on the 10-key pad of the operation panel.
• Before starting the firmware update procedure, always make sure that the machine is disconnected
from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress.
Firmware Update Procedure
• Before beginning the following, first confirm which firmware version(s) are currently installed in the
machine with SP7-801-255.
-SD Card Preparation-
1. Format an SD card with, for example, SD Formatter v1.1.
2. Create a "romdata" folder on the card.
3. Create the following folders within the "romdata" folder: B121, B620, B622, B658, B681, B685
4. Download the firmware from the server and store the files in the folder with the corresponding
model code on the SD card.
Example:
File B1215540B should be stored in the "B121" folder, whereas files B6585902B, B6585903B,
and B6585905B should be stored in the "B658" folder.
-Firmware Update-
• Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only model
firmware you want.
2. If the machine is connected to a network, disconnect the network cable from the copier.
3. Remove the interface cover ( x 1)
4. With the label on the SD card facing the rear side of the machine, insert the SD card into the slot 2
on the controller box. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so it locks in place.
5. Make sure the SD card is locked in place.
(To remove the SD card, push it in to unlock the spring lock and then release it so it pops out of the
slot.)
6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial version update screen
appears on the LCD in English.
146
Using SP Mode
7. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on the operation panel to
select the item in the menu that you want to update.
ROM/NEW What it means
Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently
ROM: installed. The first line is the module number, the second line the version
name.
Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The
NEW:
first line is the module number, the second line the version name.
• Controller, engine and operation panel firmware cannot be updated at the same time. It is
recommended to update firmware modules one by one.
8. Touch "UpDate (#)" (or ) to start the update.
• The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you touch "OpPanel".
The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervals when the LCDC firmware is updating.
The power key flashes on and off at 3 s intervals when the update is finished.
9. The "Update is Done" message appears on the operation panel after completing the updating. The
message differs depending on the firmware that has been updated.
10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the "Update is Done" message or follow the
procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.
11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.
12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.
Error Messages
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.
The error code consists of the letter "E" and a number. The example above shows error "E24" displayed.
For details, refer to the Error Message Table (see "Handling Firmware Update Error").
Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled during the update because the
module selected for update was not on the SD card.
147
Recovery after Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while the firmware is updating,
then the correct operation of the machine cannot be guaranteed after the machine is switched on again.
If the ROM update does not complete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct
operation of the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM is updated
successfully.
In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue the firmware download
automatically from the card without the menu display.
Browser Unit Update Procedure
1. Remove the slot cover [A] for the SD card ( x 1).

2. Turn the SD-card label face [A] of the browser unit to the rear of the machine. Then push it slowly
into slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.
3. Plug in and turn on the main power switch.
4. Push the "User Tools" key.
• If an administrator setting is registered for the machine, step 5 and 6 are required. Otherwise,
skip to the step 7.
5. Push the "Login/ Logout" key.
6. Login with the administrator user name and password.
7. Touch "Extended Feature Settings" twice on the LCD.
8. Touch "Uninstall" on the LCD.
9. Touch the "Browser" line.
148
Using SP Mode
10. Confirmation message appears on the LCD.

11. Touch "Yes" to proceed.
12. Reconfirmation message appears on the LCD.
13. Touch "Yes" to uninstall the browser unit.
14. You will see "Uninstalling the extended feature... Please wait.", and then "Completed".
15. Touch "Exit" to go back to the setting screen.
16. Exit "User/Tools" setting, and then turn off the main power switch.
17. Remove the SD card of the browser unit from SD card slot 2 (lower).
18. Overwrite the updated program in the "sdk" folder of the browser unit application with PC.
19. Do the "Installation Procedure" to install the browser unit.
Handling Firmware Update Errors
An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. The error code consists of
the letter "E" and a number ("E20", for example).
Error Message Table
Code Meaning Solution
20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.
21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
Cannot decompress compressed Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

22
data corrupted.
Error occurred when ROM Controller program abnormal. If the second attempt
23
update program started fails, replace controller board.
Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use another

24 SD card access error
SD card.
No HDD available for stamp

30 HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.
data download
Data incorrect for continuous Insert the SD card with the remaining data required for
31
download the download, the re-start the procedure.
149
Execute the recovery procedure for the intended

Data incorrect after download
32 module download, then repeat the installation
interrupted
procedure.
Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

33 Incorrect SD card version
corrupted.
Module mismatch - Correct SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correct data
34
module is not on the SD card) (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then install again.
SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SD card is

Module mismatch - Module on
35 for another machine. Acquire correct update data then
SD card is not for this machine
install again.

Cannot write module - Cause
other than E34, E35
install again.
Replace the update data for the module on the SD card

40 Engine module download failed
and try again, or replace the BICU board.
Operation panel module Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
42
download failed and try again, or replace the LCDC.
Stamp data module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
43
failed and try again, or replace the hard disks.
Controller module download Replace the update data for the module on the SD card
44
failed and tray again, or replace controller board.

Electronic confirmation check
failed
install again.
Test Pattern Print (SP2-109-001)
Executing Test Pattern Printing

1. Touch the item you want to activate then the item "OK" displayed on the touch panel.
2. Press the key. The copy mode is activated.
3. Specify copy settings and press the key.
4. To return to the SP mode, Touch the item "To SP" displayed on the upper left corner on the touch
panel.
150
Using SP Mode
Test Patterns
No. Pattern
0 None
1 Vertical Lines (1 Dot)
2 Vertical Lines (2 Dot)
3 Horizontal Lines (1 Dot)
4 Horizontal Lines (2 Dot)
5 Grid Vertical Line
6 Grid Horizontal Line
7 Grid Pattern Small
8 Grid Pattern Large
9 Argyle Pattern Smell
10 Argyle Pattern Large
11 Independent Pattern (1 Dot)
12 Independent Pattern (2 Dot)
13 Independent pattern (4 Dot)
14 Trimming Area
15 Hound's Tooth Check
16 Hound's Tooth Check
17 Black Band (Horizontal)
18 Black Band (Vertical)
19 Checker Flag Pattern
20 Grayscale (Vertical)
21 Grayscale (Horizontal)
22 Two Beam Density Pattern
151
23 Full Dot Pattern
24 All White Pattern
Memory Clear
The machine stores the engine data in the NVRAM on the BICU, and stores the other data in the
NVRAM on the optional controller. To distinguish between the engine data and the other data, see
SP5-801-003 through 015. This service program (SP5-801) handles the controller data. The data in the
BICU NVRAM (engine data) is cleared by SP5-801-002 while the data in the controller NVRAM
(controller data) is cleared by the other programs in SP5-801 (for exceptions, see "Exceptions" as
described below).
Data NVRAM Cleared by Remarks
Engine data BICU SP5-801-002 Any data other than controller data
SCS, IMH, MCS, Copier

application, Fax application, Printer
Controller data Controller SP5-801-xxx application, Scanner application,
Web service/network application,
NCS, R-Fax, DCS, UCS
Exceptions
SP5-801-002 clears most of the settings and counters stored in the NVRAM on the BICU (the values
return to their default values). However, the following settings are not cleared:
• SP5-811-003 (MachineSerial [ID2 Code Display])
• SP5-812-001 (Service TEL No. Setting [Service])
• SP5-812-002 (Service TEL No. Setting [Facsimile])
• SP5-907 (Plug & Play Maker/Model Name)
• SP7 (Data Log)
• SP8 (Data Log2)
Use SP5-801-002 after you have replaced the BICU NVRAM or when the BICU NVRAM data is
corrupted. When the program ends normally, the message "Completed" is displayed. When you have
replaced the controller NVRAM or when the controller NVRAM data is corrupted, use SP5-801-001.
The message is the same as the basic machine.
152
Using SP Mode
Memory Clear Procedure

1. Print out all SMC data lists ( p.153 "SMC Print (SP5-990)").
2. Do SP5-801-002.
3. Press the OK key.
4. Select "Execute." The messages "Execute?" followed by "Cancel" and "Execute" are displayed.
5. Select "Execute."
6. When the program has ended normally, the message "Completed" is displayed. If the program has
ended abnormally, an error message is displayed.
8. Adjust the printer and scanner registration and magnification (* "Copy Adjustment" in the chapter
"Replacement and Adjustment").
9. Refer to the SMC lists, and enter any values that differ from the factory settings.
10. Initialize the Developer (SP 2-801-001).
11. Check the copy quality and the paper path.
SMC Print (SP5-990)
SP5-990 outputs machine status lists.

1. Select SP5-990.
2. Select a menu:
• -001 All (Data List), -002 SP (Mode Data List), -003 User Program, -004 Logging Data,
-005 Diagnostic Report, -006 Non-Default, -007 NIB Summary, -008 Capture Log, -021
Copier User Program, -022 Scanner SP, -023 Scanner User Program
• The output given by the menu "Big Font" is suitable for faxing.
3. Press the "Execute" key.
• The machine status list is output.
4. To return to the SP mode, Touch the item "To SP" displayed on the upper left corner on the touch
panel.
ID Sensor Error Analysis (SP2-220)
The image quality may become very bad when the ID sensor does not operate properly. However,
there is no such SC code that indicates ID-sensor malfunction; instead, SP2-220 shows you some
information on the ID sensor. Check this information when the image quality is not very good.
153
The table lists the information shown with SP2-220 (Vsg/Vsp/Vsdp/Vt/Vtref Dilay).
SP Error condition Possible cause Remarks
• Toner density very low

SP2-220-1 Vsp Vsp < 2.5V or
• ID sensor pattern not -
(VP in the display) (Vsp – Vsp) < 1.00V
created
• ID sensor defective
SP2-220-2 Vsg Vsp > 2.5V or
• ID sensor dirty -
(VG in the display) (Vsg – Vsg) < 1.00V
• Drum not charged
SP2-220-3 Vsdp No Error Conditions -
Vt > 4.5V or
SP2-220-4 Vt • TD sensor defective -
Vt < 0.2V
SP2-220-5 Vtref - - -
154
Fax Service Tables
Fax Service Tables

• Fax System Service Mode
• Bit Switches
• NCU Parameters
• Dedicated Transmission Parameters
• Service RAM Addresses
155
156
6. Troubleshooting
SC Tables
Summary
There are four levels of service call conditions.
Level Definition Reset Procedure
To prevent possible damage, the machine does not

Activate the SP mode, and turn the
A operate until the service representative resets the SC
main power switch off and on.
code.
Turning the main power switch off and on resets the

Turn the main power switch off
B SC code if the error is caused by incorrect sensor
and on.
detection.
The machine operates as usual excluding the unit Turn the main power switch off
C
related to the service call. and on.
The SC history is updated. The machine operates as No SC code is displayed. Only

D
usual. the SC history is updated.
• If a problem involves circuit boards, see if you can solve the problem by disconnecting and
reconnecting all connectors before deciding to replace a circuit board.
• If a problem involves a motor lock, check the mechanical load before deciding to replace a motor
or sensor.
• If working on a fax-equipped machine, switching power off and on may cause loss of data stored
in the memory.
157
6. Troubleshooting
Engine SC Code Descriptions
No.
Symptom Possible Cause
Definition
Exposure Lamp Error
• Defective exposure lamp

• Defective exposure lamp stabilizer
101 B The scanner has scanned the white • Defective power source harness
plate, but cannot detect the certain white • Defective signal harness
level.
• High-voltage cable leak
• Defective darkness starting
characteristic
Scanner home position error 1
• Defective scanner home position

sensor
120 B The scanner home position sensor does • Defective scanner home position
not detect the scanner leaving the home sensor harness
position.
• Defective scanner motor drive
• Defective scanner motor
Scanner home position error 2
• Defective scanner home position

sensor
121 B The scanner home position sensor does • Defective scanner home position
not detect the scanner coming back to sensor harness
the home position.
• Defective scanner motor drive
• Defective scanner motor
Black level correction error
141 B The automatic adjustment has failed to • Defective SBU board

correct a current black level to the
certain level. • Defective relevant harness
158
SC Tables
No.
Definition
White level correction error
• Dewing scanner unit
The automatic adjustment has failed to • Defective scanner drive

142 B
correct a current white level to the • Defective optical section
certain level. • Defective SBU board
• Defective relevant harness
SBU Communication Error
• Defective relevant harness

144 B Cannot correctly establish • Defective destination device (e.g.,
communication with the SBU. BICU, etc)
• Defective SBU
161 IPU error
LSYNC error
• Defective the IPU or the BICU (or

-001 B bad connection between the ASIC
Detecting an error from the result of the and the LEO, LSYNC Abnormal, etc)
IPU self-check on startup.
• Cable bad connection between the
SBU and the IPU (or the BICU).
RI response error
-002 B • Defective the IPU (the BICU, the

Detecting an error on access to the RI. ICTL) or RI abnormal performance,
etc
162 IPC:PCIE error
PCIE Communication error
Doesn’t occur insertion request of

-001 B linking-up from the LYRA on startup. Or
• Defective IPU (BICU, IPU)
NOT the number of the connection lanes
detected is two.
159
6. Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
Unauthorized copy protection Failed
Detecting the ICIB wrong or NOT

165 B attached on the copier under setting • NOT the ICIB attached firmly.
unauthorized copy protection on. Or • Defective the ICIB
detecting wrong with the ICIB on startup.
Polygon motor error: Time out (On)
• Harness and the polygon motor

driver.
• Defective the polygon motor or the
polygon motor driver.
NOT detecting making the polygon
202 B • Defective polygon motor drive pulse
motor be ready in certain time after start
output (Around polygon control
polygon motor up or change the spin
part)
speed.
• Unable to monitor XSCRDY signal
(Around polygon control parts)
• Bad connection or disconnection
between the I/F
Polygon motor error: Time out (Off)

driver.
• Defective the polygon motor or the
polygon motor driver.
203 B • Defective polygon motor drive pulse
NOT XSCRDY signal becoming "H"
output (Around polygon control
(Inactive) within three seconds.
parts)
• Unable to monitor XSCRDY signal
(Around polygon control parts)
between the I/F
160
SC Tables
No.
Definition
Polygon motor error: XSCRDY signal error

driver.
204 B Detecting XSCRDY signal "H" (Inactive) • Defective the polygon motor or the
while writing. polygon motor driver.
between the I/F
LD synchro-detection error

between the I/F harness and the
syncro-detection Unit.
220 B NOT output certain syncro-detection • Defective the syncro-detection
signal within 200ms after LD lighting in
steady-rotation. • NOT the beam going into the photo
detector
• Defective the GAVD related parts,
the LD driver, the LDB, the BICU
FGATE: Fail to switch "ON"
• Defective the GAVD, PCI bridge

ASIC
230 B NOT switching FGATE signal on within • BICU, the Controller board wrong or
one second after writing start-timing. bad connection
• Defective the harness between the
BICU to the LDB
FGATE: Fail to switch "OFF"
• BICU, the Controller board wrong or

bad connection
231 B NOT switching FGATE signal off within • Defective the harness between the
nine seconds after writing end-timing. BICU to the LDB
• Defective the GAVD, PCI bridge
ASIC
161
6. Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
LD error
• Characteristic degradation of the LD

(LD broken, electric current versus
240 D Detecting two LD error flags in series light output characteristic shift, etc)
when LD lighting after the LD initializing • Bad connection or disconnection of
the harness to the LD
• Defective the LD driver parts
GAVE communication error
270 B Doesn't the value you set in a certain • Defective the BICU
resister accord with the value of the
same resister on reading. • Defective the GAVD, the CPU
SC302
High-voltage charge error RTB 38: Corrected
The maximum rate of PWM duty (50%)

302 B • Defective the MD
occurs ten times in series (20msec x 10)
• Defective harness connected to the
This error doesn’t happen when the front
HVP
door (the inter lock) opens.
P sensor error
• Disconnection of the harness to P

sensor
• Bad electrical contact of P sensor
CN
SC350~354 happen on normal
355 D • Defective the BICU
operation. This error isn't displayed on
panel but left on the history as a logging • Defective the writing section
data. • Defective developer density
• Defective high-voltage PP
• Uncleanness of the P sensor
• Defective the P sensor
162
SC Tables
No.
Definition
T sensor error warning
Detected the following value

389 D • Defective the T sensor
T sensor output value < 0.2V
• Bad contact of the connector to the T
T sensor output value > 4.0V
sensor
10 times in series.
T sensor error
After SC389 detection and executing

390 B SP2-992-001, This SC is displayed.
• Defective T sensor
In process flow, This SC occurs when
• Loose connection part
two times of T sensor output value error
are detected consecutively.
SC391
Development bias error
RTB 38: Corrected

391 B • Defective the MD
occurs 10 times in series (20msec x 10)
• Defective harness connected to the
HVP
Developer initialization error
• Defective P sensor
The P sensor does not detect a correct
pattern during developer initialization • Defective T sensor
392 B (SP2-801-001). • NOT removing heat-seal
When Vsp output is more than 2.5V, SC • Defective drum operation
appears in the case of not removing the
• Defective development roller
heat seal or an absence of developer.
operation
163
6. Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
SC401
Transfer roller leak error (positive electrode)
RTB 38: Corrected
• The feedback voltage of the
transfer roller has been more than
the certain voltage for 200msec.
(Open detecting condition)
401 B • The feedback voltage of the • Defective harness connected to HVP
transfer roller has been insufficient • Defective the MD
for 200msec. (Leak detecting
condition)
SC402
Transfer roller leak error (negative electrode) RTB 38: Corrected
The feedback voltage of the transfer

402 B roller has been more than the certain • Defective the MD
voltage (more than 4.5V) for 200msec. • Defective harness connected to the
This error doesn’t happen when the front HVP
SC411
Separation high-voltage error
RTB 38: Corrected

411 B occurs ten times in series (20msec x 10) • Defective the MD, HVP Connection
This error doesn’t happen when the front harness.
Transfer electric plus current error
Detecting "0" (Abnormal) ten times in

440 B series (200ms) while monitoring "HVP: T
+: Output error detection signal" every
20m seconds.
(Reboot the machine to clear this SC)
164
SC Tables
No.
Definition
Isolation voltage error
Detecting "0" (Abnormal) ten times in

460 B series (200ms) while monitoring "HVP:
D: Output error detection signal" every
20m seconds.
(Reboot the machine to clear this SC)
Toner bottle motor overcurrent
Detecting "Low" for more than 200msec

490 B while the motor on.
• Defective the motor drive.
Motor locked up due to overcurrent to
the drive section.
Main motor error
500 B Detecting “High” condition twenty times • Overload

in series during watching each lock
signal after switching motor on. • Defective main motor drive
SC530, 532 Fusing thermistor disconnection

RTB 37
541 A Detecting the temperature remains lower • Thermistor disconnection
than 0 degrees Celsius for 5 seconds. • Defective connector part
542 Fusing reload failed
Fusing temperature warm-up error
• The fusing temperature doesn’t rise

by more than 7 degrees for two
seconds; and this happens 5 times
-001 A consecutively. • Defective thermistor
The measure is start in 3.5 seconds after • Power source is out of warranty
activation of the heater.
This monitoring will stop in the case of
reaching the reload temperature.
165
6. Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
Time out error
(On the fusing roller inactive) • Disconnection of Heater After

NOT reaching the reload temperature in activation of the anti-overheat
-003 A 25 seconds after starting heater control. device
(On the fusing roller active)

NOT reaching the reload temperature in
35 seconds after starting heater control.
Fusing overheat error 1
• Defective the triac (Semiconductor

543 A The fusing temperature detected by the device)
thermistor is 230°C or higher for one
• Defective the IOB control board
second.
• Detective the BICU control board
Fusing overheat error 2
• Defective the triac (Semiconductor

device)
544 A The fusing temperature detected by the • Defective the IOB control board
monitor circuit is 250°C or higher.
• Defective the BICU control board
• Uncontrollable fusing condition
Fusing lamp overheat error
• Defective thermistor
545 A The fusing lamp remains on for 12 • Disconnection of Heater
seconds after starting the waiting mode. • After activation of the anti-overheat
device
547 Zero cross signal malfunction
166
SC Tables
No.
Definition
-001 Detecting fusing contact meltdown • Defective the fusing relay (Contact
adhesion, Contact separation)
-002 Detecting wrong with fusing contact
• Defective the drive circuit in the
B fusing relay
• PSU fuse (24VS) meltdown
-003 Detecting low-frequency wave
• Unsteadiness in frequency of the
commercial power source
Over zero cross frequency

557 D The number of times Low-frequency • Interruption of power source line
wave detection is less than 1 time. noise.
Consecutive fusing jam
The paper jam counter for the fusing unit

559 A reaches 3 times. The paper jam counter
is cleared if the paper is fed correctly. • Paper jam in the fusing unit.
This SC is activated only when
SP1159-001 is set to "1" (default "0").
ADF communication error
• Defective the ADF

620 B Disconnection after connection in
• Defective the IPU board
normal.
• Bad connection of the ADF
Bank communication error
• Defective the bank control board

1. Malfunction occurs on line
622 B • Defective the BICU, the IOB
connection.
• Bad connection between the bank
2. Receiving a communication error
and the main machine
notice from the URAT.
• Defective the bank control
167
6. Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
Second bank communication error
• Bad connection between the first

623 B Abnormal code is send from the bank bank and the second bank
unit. • Defective the bank control board
• NOT all connectors are in place
EEPROM communication error
669 B Cannot return to be normal condition • Defective the EEPROM

after retrying three times when the error
on EEPROM communication occurs. • Noise
Cannot receive RAPI-PER
687 B Command (Ready for image transfer) in • Defective the controller board
120 seconds after RARI-PES (Request for
image transfer) occurs. • Noise
Over the number of the banks installed error
790 B Receiving a code other than the • More than 3 of the banks are
following cord: installed. (Specific limitation for
For Model S-C5: 01H 02H Model S-C5 is 2 at maximum)
Mechanical total counter error
• Defective harness between

mechanical counter and BICU.
• Defective BICU
The condition of the mechanical counter
901 B • Defective mechanical total counter
on the electric hard is disconnection on
activating the counter when SP mode • Loose connection of harness
“Anti-tampering system” is ON. between mechanical counter and
BICU.
• Mechanical counter has been pulled
out while accounting operation.
168
SC Tables
No.
Definition
Model information error
NOT according manufacturing number • Defective BICU

995 B
(11 digits) with product identification • Defective NVRAM
code. • Defective controller
SC Code Descriptions
SC6xx
No.
Symptom Possible Cause/Countermeasure
Definition
MF accounting device error 1
632 C The machine sends a data frame. No

• Defective or broken line between
normal end signal returns. This
machine and device
symptom happens three times.
633 C The machine is communicating with the

• Defective or broken line between
accounting device. The break signal
machine and device
returns.
• Defective accounting device

634 C A backup RAM error is reported from controller
the accounting device. • Defective battery in the accounting
device
• Defective accounting device

635 C A battery voltage error is reported from controller
the accounting device. • Defective battery in the accounting
device
169
6. Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
636 SD Card Error
Expanded authentication module error
There is no expanded authentication

module in the machine. 1. Install the correct SD card or the file
-001 B The SD card or the file of the expanded of the expanded authentication
authentication module is broken. module.
There is no DESS module in the 2. Install the DESS module.
machine.
Version error
-002 B The version of the expanded 1. Install the correct file of the
authentication module is not correct. expanded authentication module.
OSM usercode file error
• No usercode file exists in the SD

card
• Irregular usercode file
NOT found the "usercode" file in the • The data in the usercode file is
rootfolder, in the SD card irregular
-011 B
Or cannot read the usercode file • NOT coping the application with the
correctly. "usercode" file to the SD card.
*This SC occurs only for OSM IC card. 1. Make a customer usercode by the
OSM usercode setting tool
(IDissuer.exe) and put it in the
rootfolder where IC card module
(eccm.mod) is stored.
637 Tracking APP error
• Causes of failing to notice tracking

SDK APP (e.g.: Defective tracking
-001 B NOT found the tracking information. SDK APP, Abnormal internal
communication)
1. Power source OFF/ON
170
SC Tables
No.
Definition
Administration server error
• Defective tracking administration

server
-002 B
NOT found the tracking information. • Defective tracking SDK APP
• Defective Network
1. Power source OFF/ON
Engine to controller communication error (Check Sum error)

640 D
Incorrect sum data. • Defective the PCI related hardware
Engine to controller communication error (No response)
No response to the frame from the

641 B engine when frame sending according
to RAPI protocol is done from the
controller.
650 Communication error of the remote service modem (Cumin-M)
Authentication error
-001 C 1. Check and set the correct user name

The authentication for the Embedded
(SP5816-156) and password
RCG-M fails at a dial up connection.
(SP5816-157).
Incorrect modem setting

-004 C Dial up fails due to the incorrect modem 1. Check and set the correct AT
setting. command (SP5819-160).
Communication line error
-005 C The supplied voltage is not sufficient due

1. Consult with the user's local
to the defective communication line or
telephone company.
defective connection.
Incorrect dial up connection

651 An unexpected error occurs when the modem (RCG-M) tries to call the center with a dial up
connection.
171
6. Troubleshooting
No.
Definition
-001 D Program parameter error • Software bug.

1. No action required because this SC
-002 D Program execution error does not interfere with operation of
the machine.
Engine startup error
Just after the main power is turned on or

the machine is recovering from auto off • Poor connection between the BICU
670 B mode, the engine ready signal assertion and controller board
fails. • Defective BICU
Just after the main power is turned on, • Defective controller board
the engine does not respond.
Controller-to-operation panel communication error at startup
• Controller stalled
• Controller board installed incorrectly
• Defective controller board
After powering on the machine, • Operation panel connector loose or
672 B communication between the controller defective
and operation panel does not begin, or
• Poor connection of DIMM and
the communication is interrupted after a
optional boards on the controller
normal startup.
board
1. Check the setting of SP5875-001. If
the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change it to
"0 (ON)".
SC8xx
No.
Definition
Firmware update error

818 B This error may occur while firmware 1. Reboot the copier and complete the
update. undone update.
172
SC Tables
Monitor Error
This is a file detection and electronic

file signature check error when the
boot loader attempts to read the self- • OS Flash ROM data defective;
817 diagnostic module, system kernel, or change the controller firmware
B
root system files from the OS Flash • SD card data defective; use another
ROM, or the items on the SD card in SD card
the controller slot are false or
corrupted.
Kernel stop
819 Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system processing. One of the
following messages was displayed on the operation panel.
[5032] B HAIC-P2 error
[6261] B init died

• System program defective
[0696e] B Process error • Controller board defective
[0766d] B VM full error • Optional board defective

1. Replace controller firmware
[554C] B USB error
[----] B The others
820 Self-Diagnostic Error: CPU
• [0001-0015] [000A-000D]: Detailed error code
• Defective CPU device

During the boot monitor program
B and self-diagnostic, any exception • Defective boot monitor program or
or cut-in are not supposed to self-diagnostic program
happen. If these happen, it is defined 1. Replace the controller board.
as SC.
2. Reinstall the system firmware.
173
6. Troubleshooting
[00FF]: Detailed error code
• Defective CPU
• Defective local bus
B 1. Turn the main power switch off and
Cache access error in the CPU
on.
2. Reinstall the system program.
3. Replace the controller board.
[0601, 0602, 0605, 0606, 0607, 0609]: Detailed error code
B Exceptional command does not • Defective CPU devices

operate even though it is executed
on purpose. 1. Replace the controller board.
[060A-060E]: Detailed error code
• Defective CPU devices

B Cut-in command does not operate
• Defective ASIC devices
when it is executed.
[0610]: Detailed error code
B Timer cut-in does not operate even • Defective CPU devices

though it is set. 1. Replace the controller board.
• Defective ASIC
B • Defective devices in which ASIC
Cut-in in ASIC occurs.
detects cut-in.
[06FF]: Detailed error code

B The pipeline clock frequency rate is • Mode bit data error, which is used for
different from the prescribed value. initializing CPU.
174
SC Tables
• Insufficient CPU cache

B The result when the program is • Insufficient memory process speed
executed in the command cache is
different from desirable value. 1. Replace the controller board.
2. Replace the RAM DIMM.
[0709, 070A]: Detailed error code

Even you write the data in the only • Incorrect SPD
B cache of memory, the data is
• Boot mode setting error
actually written in another area (not
cache) of memory. 1. Replace the controller board.
[0801, 0804, 0807, 0808, 0809, 80A]: Detailed error code
B An error occurs when checking the • Defective CPU devices

TLB. 1. Replace the controller board.
[4002-4005]: Detailed error code
B The calculation error in the CPU • Defective CPU

occurs. 1. Replace the CPU.
821 Self-Diagnostic Error: ASIC
ASIC error
[0B00] B The write-&-verify check error has • Defective controller board

occurred in the ASIC. 1. Replace the controller.
ASIC not detected
• ASIC (controller board defective)

[0B06] B • Poor connection between North
The ASIC of the I/O is not detected.
Bridge and PCI I/F.
1. Replace controller board.
175
6. Troubleshooting
Timer error between ASIC and CPU
• System firmware problem

• Defective RAM-DIMM
The CPU checks if the ASIC timer
[0D05] B works properly compared with the • Defective controller
CPU timer. If the ASIC timer does not • Reinstall the controller system
function in the specified range, this firmware.
SC code is displayed.
1. Replace the RAM-DIMM.
Video bridge device (ASIC) error 1
[50A1] B • Defective I/F between the video

The CPU does not detect the video bridge device and controller
bridge device.
Video bridge device (ASIC) register error 1
[50A2] B The CPU detects the video bridge • Defective I/F between the video
device, but detects error data from bridge device and controller
the video bridge device. 1. Replace the controller board.
Self-diagnostic error: HDD (Hard Disk Drive)

[XXXX]: Detailed error code
822
When the main switch is turned on or starting the self-diagnostic, the HDD stays busy for
the specified time or more.
[3003] C Timeout error • Loose connection

• Defective HDD
• Defective controller
[3004] C Command error 1. Check that the HDD is correctly
connected to the controller.
2. Replace the HDD or the controller
823 Self-diagnostic Error: NIB
MAC address check sum error
[6101] C The result of the MAC address check • Defective controller

sum does not match the check sum
stored in ROM. 1. Replace the controller.
176
SC Tables
PHY IC error
[6104] C The PHY IC on the controller cannot
Same as SC823-[6101]
be correctly recognized.
PHY IC loop-back error
[6105] C An error occurred during the loop-

back test for the PHY IC on the Same as SC823-[6101]
controller.
Self-diagnostic Error: NVRAM
• Loose connection
• Defective standard NVRAM
824 • Defective controller
B The controller cannot recognize the
[1401] standard NVRAM installed or 1. Check the standard NVRAM is firmly
detects that the NVRAM is defective. inserted into the socket.
2. Replace the NVRAM.
3. Replace the controller
Self-diagnostic Error: RTC/Optional NVRAM
[1501]: Clock error
• An RTC device is recognized,

B
and the difference between the
• RTC defective
RTC device and the CPU
exceeds the defined limit. 1. Replace the RTC device.
826 • No RTC device is recognized.
[15FF]: RTC not detected
• NVRAM without RTC installed

B • Backup battery discharged
The RTC device is not detected.
1. Replace the NVRAM with another
NVRAM with an RTC device.
827 Self-diagnostic Error: RAM
177
6. Troubleshooting
Verification error
• Loose connection
Error is detected during a write/ • Defective SDRAM DIMM

[0201] B
verify check for the standard RAM • Defective controller
(SDRAM DIMM). 1. Replace the SDRAM DIMM.
2. Replace the controller.
Resident memory error
• Defective RAM DIMM

[0202] B The SPD values in all RAM DIMM • Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
are incorrect or unreadable. • Defective 12C bus
828 Self-diagnostic Error: ROM
Boost lap code error
The boot monitor and OS program • Defective ROM DIMM

[0101] B stored in the ROM DIMM is • Defective controller
checked. If the check sum of the
program is incorrect, this SC code is 1. Replace the ROM DIMM.
displayed. 2. Replace the controller.
Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM
Verify error for optional RAM.
[0301]
829 B • Make sure that the resident RAM is
Verification error (Slot 1) installed in the correct slot.
[0302] • Make sure the optional RAM is

installed in the correct slot (Slot 0)
Composition error (Slot 1)
835 Self-diagnostic error: Centronic device
• IEEE1284 connector error

Loopback connector is connected but • Centronic loopback connector
[1102] C
check results in an error. defective
178
SC Tables
• ASIC device error

• IEEE1284 connector error
Loopback connector is connected but
[110C] C • Centronic loopback connector
check results in an error.
defective
• Centronic loopback connector not

connected correctly
Centronic loopback connector is not • Centronic loopback connector
[1120] C connected for detailed self-diagnostic defective
test.
• ASIC device defective
Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator
• Defective clock generator

838
B A verify error occurred when setting • Defective I2C bus
[2701] data was read from the clock
generator via the I2C bus. • Defective I2C port on the CPU
839 USB NAND Flash ROM error
839 Serial Flash access error
The result of reading and writing in

B software status register of Serial
[9001] • Defective Serial Flash
Flash, the device for certification,
came to an error.
The ID of the USB NAND Flash ROM

[9101] B
cannot be read. • Defective controller board
The USB NAND Flash ROM is 1. Replace the controller board.

[9110] B
disconnected.
EEPROM access error
While I/O operation to EEPROM

840 B Three times retry is ineffective after
reading error • Defective EEPROM
Writing error occurs.
179
6. Troubleshooting
EEPROM reading error
All of the data values being read from

841 B three areas which are given EEPROM • Particular area in EEPROM has been
mirroring, are different from each changed by some cause
other.
Nand-Flash update VerifyError
SCS detected abnormal writing

842 D (verifying Error) in the module which
• Defective Nand-Flash
is written in Nand-Flash on the time of
ROM remote update or ROM update.
Wireless card startup error
The machine starts up. The

853 C IEEE802 11b card connection • Loose connection between the
board is recognized. The wireless wireless card and the connection
LAN card or bluetooth card is not board
recognized.
Wireless card access error
The machine has been reading the

854 C data from the card. The machine • Loose connection between the
loses access to the card; the wireless wireless card and the connection
LAN card or bluetooth card board
connection board is still recognized.
Wireless card error

855 C Some illegal data is found in the
• Defective wireless card
card.
Wireless card connection board error
856 C An error is detected in the wireless

• Defective wireless card connection
LAN card or bluetooth card
board
connection board.
180
SC Tables
USB I/F Error
• Defective controller
857 C 1. Check the USB connections, and
USB interface error is detected. make sure that they are securely
connected.
HDD Encryption unit error 1

858 A serious error occurs when data is encrypted to update an encryption key with the HDD
encryption unit.
Encryption key acquisition error:

[0] The controller fails to get a new
encryption key.
Encryption key setting for HDD error: • Defective SATA chip on the
[1] The controller fails to copy a new controller board
encryption key to the HDD. 1. Replace the controller board.
NVRAM data encryption error 1: • Defective NVRAM on the controller

[2] A An error occurs while the NVRAM board
data is encrypted. 1. Replace the NVRAM.
NVRAM data encryption error 2:

[30] An error occurs before the NVRAM
data is encrypted.
Other error:
[31] A serious error occurs while the data • Same as SC991
is encrypted.
HDD Encryption unit error 2

859 A serious error occurs when the HDD data is encrypted to update an encryption key with
the HDD encryption unit.
181
6. Troubleshooting
• No HDD installed
• Unformatted HDD
HDD check error: • The encryption key on the controller
[8]
The HDD is not correctly installed. is different from the one on the HDD
1. Install the HDD correctly.
2. Initialize the HDD.
C Power failure during the data
• Power failure during the data
encryption:
[9] encryption
The data encryption (NVRAM and
1. Initialize the HDD.
HDD) has not been completed.
Data read/write error:

[10] The DMAC error is detected twice or • Same as SC863
more.
HDD: Initialization error
• HDD not initialized

860 The controller detects that the hard • Defective HDD
B
disk fails. 1. Reformat the HDD.
1. Replace the HDD.
Bad sector number error
The number of bad sectors in the • Defective HDD

862
B HDD (image data area) goes over 1. Format the HDD with SP5-832-002.
101. 2. Replace the HDD.
HDD: Read error
• Defective HDD
863 The data stored in the HDD cannot be • Defective controller
C
read correctly. 1. Replace the HDD.
HDD: CRC error
864 While reading data from the HDD or • Defective HDD

C storing data in the HDD, data
transmission fails. 1. Replace the HDD.
182
SC Tables
HDD: Access error
865 An error is detected while operating • Defective HDD

C
the HDD. 1. Replace the HDD.
SD card authentication error
866 C A digital license error of an SD card • SD card data has corrupted.

application is detected. 1. Store correct data in the SD card.
SD card error
867 B An application SD card is removed

from the boot slot while an • An application SD card is ejected.
application is activated.
SD card access error

(-13 to -3: File system error, other number: Device error)
• SD card not inserted correctly

• SD card defective
• Controller board defective
868 B 1. For a file system error, format the SD
An error report is sent from the SD card on PC.
card reader. 2. For a device error, turn the main
switch off and on.
3. Remove and re-install the SD card.
4. Replace the SD card.
Address book data error
SC870 • Data corruption

RTB 45
• Defective hard disk
The address book in the hard disk is
accessed. An error is detected in • Defective controller software
870 C
the address book data; address 1. Replace the hard disk (the user codes
book data is not read; or data is not and counters are recovered when the
written into the address book. main switch is turned on if those data
are stored in Smart Device Monitor
for Admin).
183
6. Troubleshooting
• To recover from the error, do any of the following countermeasures:

• Format the address book by using SP5-846-050 (all data in the address
book–including the user codes and counters–is initialized).
HDD receiving mail data error
• Defective HDD
• Turned off the power source while
872 C Defecting wrong with the HDD on accessing to the HDD
startup. 1. SP5832-007 (Format Rec Mail) to
initialize the HDD
2. Replace the HDD
HDD sending mail data error
• Defective HDD
• Turned off the power source while
873 C Detecting wrong with the HDD on accessing to the HDD
startup. 1. SP5832-008 (Format Sed Mail) to
initialize the HDD
2. Replace the HDD
Mass erasing error (Data area erasing)
• HDD erasing program detected an

error
• An error occurs while NVRAM data
erasing
HDD/NVRAM data erasing error • Unset erasing program (mass erasing
was detected. option)
874 B
The case you went out from the mode 1. Reboot and retry the erasing
while operating before finishing mass operation
erasing (HDD/NVRAM data erasing) 2. If there is wrong with the HDD (e.g.,
option, this SC occurs. defective the HDD sector), this error
will happen again.
3. Reset the option when the error
occurs by unsetting of the mass erase
option.
184
SC Tables
Mass erasing error (HDD erasing)
An error was detected before HDD • Failed HDD logic erasing

875 B erasing when HDD/Data erasing
was executed. • Failed to erase the data each
module has
(The case data erasing failed, or The
case HDD logic erasing failed) 1. Reboot the machine
Log Data Error

876 An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during machine
operation. This can be caused by switching the machine off while it is operating.
• Damaged log data file in the HDD

-001 C Log Data Error 1
1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
• An encryption module not installed

1. Disable the log encryption setting
with SP9730-004 (“0” is off.)
2. Install the DESS module.
• Invalid log encryption key due to

defective NVRAM data
-003 C Log Data Error 3 1. Initialize the HDD with SP5832-004.
2. Disable the log encryption setting
with SP9730-004 (“0” is off.)
• Unusual log encryption function due

-004 C Log Data Error 4 to defective NVRAM data
• Installed NVRAM or HDD which is

used in another machine
-005 C Log Data Error 5 1. Reinstall the previous NVRAM or
HDD.
• Other than the above causes

1. Ask your supervisor.
185
6. Troubleshooting
HDD erasing error
• SD card for the hard disc encryption

unit is ejected
• Defective SD card for the hard disc
encryption unit
Cannot operate successive erasing of 1. The case that the SD card is ejected,
877-00 C the hard disc encryption unit under insert a normal condition SD card for
the condition of the successive erasing the unit into the slot after the main
setting ON. power switch OFF.
2. The case that the SD card is
defective, replace the NVRAM on
the machine under the condition of
you preparing the new option SD
card.
878 TPM system authentication error
• Incorrect updating for the system

firmware
The system firmware is not
-00 B • Defective flash ROM on the
authenticated by TPM (security chip).
controller board
USB Flash error
-01 B Defective file system of USB Flash • USB Flash file system is broken
memory. 1. Replace the controller board
TPM error
-02 B • Defective TPM

Defective TPM or TPM drive
1. Replace the controller board
TCSD error
• Cannot start TPM Software Stack up

-03 B • NOT found necessary files for TPM
Defective TPM Software Stack
Software Stack
1. Replace the controller board
186
SC Tables
File Format Converter (MLB) error
880 B A request to get access to the MLB

was not answered within the • MLB defective
specified time.
Administration area error
Defective the software.

This error occurs in the following • Caused by stored un-authentication
881 B timing: information in the software (NOT
1. Giving a job to the printer caused by user operation)
2. Login from the panel 1. Reboot the machine
3. Accessing from WEB browser
Software operation error (Receiving signal end)
1. Reboot the machine

899 B Abnormal operation occurs in the 2. Update the firmware.
controller program (Hardware or 3. If this SC does not clear with No.1, 2
Software) processes, replace the controller
board.
SC9xx
Electronic total counter error

900 B The value of the total counter is out of
• Defective NVRAM
the normal range.
Printer error
920 C • Defective software

An application error that stops the
machine operation is detected. 1. Unexpected hardware resource
(e.g., memory shortage)
187
6. Troubleshooting
Printer font error
• A necessary font is not found in the

A necessary font is not found in the SD SD card.
921 C
card when the printer application • The SD card data is corrupted.
starts. 1. Check that the SD card stores correct
data.
Net file error
The management file for net files is

corrupted; net files are not normally • Defective hardware
925 read.
C • Data corruption
Netfiles: Jobs to be printed from the
document server using a PC and the • Defective software
DeskTopBinder software
Software performance error
The software attempted to perform an

unexpected operation.
• When this error occurs, the file

name, address, and data will be • Software defective
990 B
stored in NVRAM. This • Internal parameter incorrect
information can be checked by
• Insufficient working memory
using SP7-403. See the data
and the situation in which this SC
occurs. Then report the data and
conditions to your technical
control center.
Software continuity error
The software attempted to perform an

991 D unexpected operation. However, • Logged only; the machine can
unlike SC990, the process can keep continue to operate
on running.
Undefined error
992 B An error not controlled by the system

occurred (the error does not come • Defective software program
under any other SC code).
188
SC Tables
Over-limit OP panel administrative record error
The record, which composes the • In using the operation panel, if

994-00 D display items and which is controlled operating reaches deep layer with
by the service layer, is over the certain multiple applications active, the
limit. record may go over the limitation.
Application function selection error
• Software for that application is

defective
• An option required by the
application (RAM, DIMM, board) is
997 C The application selected by a key not installed.
press on the operation panel does not
start or ends abnormally. • Too complicated nest of the fax
group address
1. As for the fax operation problem,
simplify the nest of the fax group
address.
Application start error
• Software for that application is

defective
After switching the machine on, the • An option required by the
998 B application does not start within 60 s. application (RAM, DIMM, board) is
(No applications start or end not installed.
normally.) 1. Check the setting of SP5875-001. If
the setting is set to "1 (OFF)", change
it to "0 (OFF)".
189
6. Troubleshooting
Electrical Component Defects

Sensor/Switch
Sensor Connector Message Remarks
CN127
Registration Sensor Paper jam -
SN
CN129
Paper End Sensor Load paper -
SN
Bypass Paper End CN130 The machine cannot detect paper

(None)
Sensor SN on the bypass tray.
CN128
Paper Path Sensor Paper jam -
SN
CN128
Exit Sensor Paper jam -
SN
Image Density (ID) CN132

(None) Print quality may become worse.
Sensor SN
The connector is shared with the

Toner Density (TD) CN123 SC901
mechanical total counter.
Sensor
PCU Reset PCU correctly -
CN404 SC120 -
Scanner HP Sensor
SN SC120 -
CN404 SC120 -
Platen Cover Sensor The copier does not warm up when
SN (None)
you open the platen cover.
DF Guide Open DF CN04 Paper jam -

Sensor SN (None) -
190
Electrical Component Defects
Sensor Connector Message Remarks
DF Original Set DF CN04 Paper jam -

Sensor Sensor (None) Originals are not detected.
DF Registration DF CN03 -
Paper jam
Sensor SN Originals are correctly transported.
DF CN03 Paper jam -

Inverter Sensor
SN (None) -
DF CN04 -
Exit Sensor Paper jam
SN -
CN114 Front door open -

Front Door Switch
SW Front door open
CN114 Right door open -

Right Door Switch
SW Right door open -
CNxxx: The connector on the BICU board.

DF CNxxx: The connector on the DF connection board.
SN: The connector on the sensor.
SW: The connector on the switch.
PCU: The connector on the PCU.
Blown Fuse Conditions
All of these fuses are on the power supply unit.
Rating
Fuse At main switch ON
100 – 127 V 250 V
FU1 15A/250V 8A/250 V No response
FU2 8A/250 V 4A/250 V No response
191
6. Troubleshooting
Card Save Function

Overview
Card Save:
• The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card with no
print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4. Card Save will
remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have been used.
• Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be created. This
file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
• Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has "Add"
and "New" menu items.
• Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If the card
becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the operation panel.
Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
• Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
• Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks will not
work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
Procedure
1. Turn the main power switch OFF.

2. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the controller board. Then turn the power ON.
• To determine which slot is the service slot, please see the service manual.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select "Printer SP".
5. Select "SP1-001-001".
192
Card Save Function
1. Use the numeric key "4" to turn bit 4 ON and be sure to press "#" button to confirm. The result
should look like: 00010000 as shown above. By doing this Card Save option will appear in "List/
Test Print".
2. Exit SP Mode.
3. Press the " " button.
4. Select "Printer Features".
5. Select "List/Test Print".
1. Select "Card Save (ADD) or Card Save (New)".

2. Select OK to the message "Switching to Card Save mode.". Then exit the "List/Test Print" menu.
3. Send a job to the printer.
4. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with no print
output. Nothing is displayed on the screen indicating that a Card Save operation was successful.
193
6. Troubleshooting
5. To exit Card Save mode, Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000.
6. After main power switch is turned off, remove the SD card.
Error Messages
Card Save error messages:
• Init error: A card save process (i.e. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to initialize.
• Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
• No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
• Write error: Failed to write to the card.
• Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing "OK" will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready state.
194
Fax Troubleshooting Guide
Fax Troubleshooting Guide

• Fax Error Codes
• IFAX Troubleshooting
• IP-Fax Troubleshooting
195
6. Troubleshooting
196
7. Energy Saving
Energy Save
Energy Saver Modes
Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the timers are
at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be different. For example, if
the timer is set to 240 min., the grey area will disappear, and no energy is saved before 240 min.
expires.
Timer Settings
Sleep Mode Timer
After a specified period has passed, or the [Energy Saver] key is pressed, the machine enters Sleep
Mode in order to conserve energy.
Specify the time to elapse before Sleep Mode.
You can specify this setting only if [Sleep Mode] is set to [Enable] in [Administrator Tools] in [System
Settings].
Default: [1 minute]
197
7. Energy Saving
The time can be set from 10 seconds to 240 minutes, using the number keys.
Sleep Mode Timer may not work when error messages appear.
Depending on which Embedded Software Architecture application is installed on it, the machine might
take longer than indicated to enter Sleep Mode.
Recommendation
We recommend that the default settings should be kept.
• If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their energy
costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment of extra energy
use.
• If it is necessary to change the settings, please try a shorter setting first, such as 30 min., then go to
a longer one (such as 60 min.) if the customer is not satisfied.
• If the timer is set to the maximum value, the machine will not begin saving energy until 240 minutes
has expired after the last job. This means that after the customer has finished using the machine for
the day, energy will be consumed that could otherwise be saved.
• If you change the settings, the energy consumed can be measured using SP8941, as explained
below.
Energy Save Effectiveness
SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in each mode.
• 8941-001: Operation mode
• 8941-002: Ready mode
• 8941-005: Sleep mode
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the amount
of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications are
measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customers site, a watt meter must be used to measure the actual
energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 002 005.
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8941 001 002 005 again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the later
measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
198
Energy Save
• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)

Here is an example calculation.
Time Power
Power Differences Consumption
SP8941: Start Time: End Time:
Machine Consumption (Data:b - (Data:a x
(W): Machine (min.) (min.) Data: c) Data:d)
Date Status
Data: a Data: b Data: c (min.) (Wmin.)
Data: d Data: e
001:
Operation Operating
mode 1081.8 Time 21089.0 21386.0 297.0 321294.6
Ready 002:
mode Standby
(stand by) 214.0 Time 306163.0 308046.0 1883.0 402962.0
005:
Sleep Off mode
mode 7.0 Time 508776.0 520377.0 11601.0 81207.0
Total Time of Data: d (min.) 13781.0
Total Time of Data: d/60min. (Hour) 229.68
Total Power Consumption of Data: e (Wmin.) 805463.60
Total Power Consumption of Data: e /60min./1000W (KWH) 13.42
199
7. Energy Saving
Paper Save
Effectiveness of Duplex/Combine Function
Duplexing and the combine functions reduce the amount of paper used. This means that less energy
overall is used for paper production, which improves the environment.
1. Duplex:
Reduce paper volume in half!
2. Combine mode:
Reduce paper volume in half!
3. Duplex + Combine:
Using both features together can further reduce paper volume by 3/4!
200
Paper Save
To check the paper consumption, look at the total counter and the duplex counter.
The total counter counts all pages printed.
• For one duplex page, the total counter goes up by 2.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the total counter goes up by 3.
The duplex counter counts pages that have images on both sides.
• For one duplex page, the duplex counter goes up by 1.
• For a duplex job of a three-page original, the duplex counter will only increase by 1, even though
two sheets are used.
Recommendation
Please explain the above features to the customers, so that they can reduce their paper usage.
Model S-C5
• Total counter: SP 8581-001
• Duplex counter: SP 8411-001
• Single-sided with combine mode: SP 8421-004
• Duplex with combine mode: SP 8421-005
The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of
single-sided and duplex jobs
Duplex mode:
Simplex Sheet Duplex Sheets Paper Total counter Duplex counter

Originals
used used Saved SP8501-001 SP8411-001
1 1 1 0 1 0
2 2 1 1 2 1
201
7. Energy Saving

Originals
3 3 2 1 3 1
4 4 2 2 4 2
5 5 3 2 5 2
10 10 5 5 10 5
20 20 10 10 20 10
If combine mode is used, the total and duplex counters work in the same way as explained previously.
The following table shows paper savings and how the counters increase for some simple examples of
duplex/combine jobs.
2 in 1 mode:

Originals
1 1 1 0 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 2 1 2 2
4 4 2 2 2 2
5 5 3 2 3 2
10 10 5 5 5 5
20 20 10 10 10 10
Duplex + 2 in 1 mode:

Originals
1 1 1 0 1 1
2 2 1 1 1 1
3 3 1 2 2 2
4 4 1 3 2 2
202
Paper Save

Originals
5 5 2 3 3 3
6 6 2 4 3 3
7 7 2 5 4 4
8 8 2 6 4 4
9 9 3 6 5 5
10 10 3 7 5 5
11 11 3 8 6 6
12 12 3 9 6 6
203
MEMO
204 EN
Model S-C5
Machine Code: D127/D128
Appendices
26 November, 2011
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Appendix: Specifications
Specifications......................................................................................................................................................5
Copier.............................................................................................................................................................5
Printer...............................................................................................................................................................7
Scanner...........................................................................................................................................................8
FAX..................................................................................................................................................................9
General..................................................................................................................................................9
IFAX Specifications..............................................................................................................................10
IP-FAX Specifications..........................................................................................................................12
Fax Unit Configuration........................................................................................................................12
ARDF.............................................................................................................................................................13
Paper Tray Unit............................................................................................................................................13
Supported Paper Sizes....................................................................................................................................15
Original Paper Sizes....................................................................................................................................15
Paper Feed...................................................................................................................................................16
2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables
Maintenance Tables........................................................................................................................................19
3. Appendix: SP Mode Tables
System Service Mode......................................................................................................................................21
Service Mode Tables (System SP Tables)..................................................................................................21
SP1-XXX (Feed)...................................................................................................................................21
SP2-XXX (Drum)...................................................................................................................................27
SP4-XXX (Scanner)..............................................................................................................................40
SP5-XXX (Mode).................................................................................................................................55
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)......................................................................................................................103
SP7-XXX (Data Log)..........................................................................................................................105
SP8-XXX (Data Log 2)......................................................................................................................112
SP-9XXX (Etc)....................................................................................................................................139
Input Check (SP5-803).............................................................................................................................145
Conducting Input Check...................................................................................................................145
Input Check Table.............................................................................................................................145
Output Check (SP5-804)..........................................................................................................................147
Conducting Output Check...............................................................................................................147
1
Output Check Table.........................................................................................................................147
Printer Service Mode (Print SP Tables)....................................................................................................149
Service Mode Table.........................................................................................................................149
SP Modes Related to Printer Controller..........................................................................................154
Scanner Program Mode Table (Scanner SP Tables)..............................................................................154
Service Table Key.............................................................................................................................154
4. Appendix: Fax Troubleshooting Guide
Fax Error Codes.............................................................................................................................................159
IFAX Troubleshooting....................................................................................................................................178
IP-Fax Troubleshooting..................................................................................................................................181
IP-Fax Transmission...................................................................................................................................181
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name........................................................................................181
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway......................................................................................................182
Cannot send by Alias Fax number..................................................................................................182
IP-Fax Reception........................................................................................................................................184
Cannot receive by IP Address/Host name.....................................................................................184
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway..................................................................................................184
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number..............................................................................................185
5. Appendix: Fax Service Program
System Service Mode....................................................................................................................................187
SP1-XXX (Bit Switches)..............................................................................................................................187
SP2-XXX (RAM).........................................................................................................................................188
SP3-XXX (Machine Set)............................................................................................................................188
SP4-XXX (ROM Version)...........................................................................................................................189
SP5-XXX (RAM Clear)...............................................................................................................................189
SP6-XXX (Report).......................................................................................................................................190
SP7-XXX (Tests)..........................................................................................................................................192
Bit Switches.....................................................................................................................................................193
System Switches.........................................................................................................................................193
I-Fax Switches ...........................................................................................................................................204
Printer Switches..........................................................................................................................................212
Communication Switches..........................................................................................................................217
G3-1 Switches...........................................................................................................................................225
2
IP Fax Switches..........................................................................................................................................236
NCU Parameters............................................................................................................................................245
Dedicated Transmission Parameters.............................................................................................................259
Programming Procedure...........................................................................................................................259
Parameters.................................................................................................................................................259
Fax Parameters.................................................................................................................................259
E-mail Parameters.............................................................................................................................263
3
4
Specifications
Copier
Configuration: Desktop
Copy Process: Laser beam scanning and electro-photographic printing
Originals: Sheet/Book/Object
Maximum
Original Size: A4 / 81/2" x 14"
A4 / 81/2" x 14" (ARDF)
Maximum
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 11" SEF (Copier's paper tray)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 14" SEF (Bypass)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 14" SEF (Optional paper tray)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 14" SEF (Duplex)
Minimum
Copy Paper Size: A5 LEF / 81/2" x 51/2" LEF (Copier's paper tray)
A6 SEF/ 81/2" x 51/2" (Bypass)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 11” SEF (Optional paper tray unit)
A4 SEF / 81/2" x 11” SEF (Duplex)
Custom sizes in the bypass tray:
Width: 90 – 216 mm (3.5" – 8.5")
Length: 139 – 600mm (5.48" – 23.62")
Standard paper tray; optional paper tray: 60 – 90 g/m2, 16 – 24

lb.
Copy Paper Weight:
Bypass: 60 – 157 g/m2, 16 – 42 lb.
Duplex: 64 – 90 g/m2, 20 – 24 lb.
5
A4 Version LT Version
200% 155%
Enlargement
141% 129%
Reproduction Ratios: Full Size 100% 100%
93% 93%
Reduction 71% 78%
50% 65%
Zoom: 50% to 200%, in 1% steps
Power Source: 120 – 127 V / 15A, 60 Hz or 220 – 240 V / 10 A, 50/60 Hz
Maximum: 1100 W (EU), (NA)
Energy Saver: 35 W or less
Power Consumption: SP: 2.8 W SPF: 3.1 W (NA)

Sleep Mode:
SP: 3.0 W SPF: 3.3 W (EU)
Off Mode: None
Sound Power Level
Standby 40 dB
Noise Emission:
Operating (copier only) 66.5 dB
Operating (full-system) 70.5 dB
Copier: 476 x 450 x 371 mm (19.4" x 18" x 14.8")

Dimensions (W x D x H) With optional paper tray unit: 485 x 454 x 511 mm (18.4" x 17.7" x
20.1")
23 kg or less (26kg or less including ARDF)

Weight:
*The weights do not include toner bottle.
Resolution: 600 dpi
Memory Copy: 30 cpm (2-sided copy: 18 cpm)

Copying Speed:
ARDF 1 to 1: 30cpm
Warm-up Time: 30 seconds or less (at 20°C [68°F])
6
Specifications
6 seconds or less
Note: Measurement conditions
• From the ready state, with the polygonal mirror motor spinning.
First Copy Time:
• A4/LT SEF copying
• From copier's paper tray
• The time from pushing copy start button
Copy Number Input: Numeric keypad, 1 to 99 (increment, decrement)
Manual Image Density: 7 steps
Default: 1 minute
Auto Off Timer
Range: 1 to 240 minutes
Default: 1 minute
Energy Saver Timer:
Rage: 1 to 240 minutes
Paper Tray: 250 sheets

Copy Paper Capacity: Optional Paper Tray Unit: 500 sheets x 1
Bypass Tray: 100 sheets
Copy-Tray Capacity 250 sheets
Toner Replenishment: Cartridge replacement (230 g/cartridge)
Toner Yield 8k copies /toner bottle
Auto reverse document feeder

Optional Equipment: Paper tray unit
Anti-condensation heater for paper tray unit
Printer
600 dpi (PCL 6/PCL5e/PS3/RPCS)

Resolution: 300 dpi (PCL5e/PS3)
600 dpi (RPCS (XPS))
Printing speed: 30 cpm (A4, 8 1/2” x 11”)
7
USB 2.0 Type A / B

Ethernet (100BASE-TX/10BASE-T)
IEEE1284 ECP (option)
Interface:
Wireless LAN (IEEE802.11a/g) (option)
Gigabit Ethernat (1000BASE-T) (option)
Bluetooth V2 (option)
Network protocol: TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/SPX
RPCS
PCL5e / 6 (XL)
Printer language: PostScript3
Adobe PS3/PDF
Media Print: JPEG / TIFF
PCL:
45 fonts
13 International fonts
Resident Fonts:
PS:
136 fonts
Euro Currency supported.
Memory: 1GB
Windows XP/Vista/7/Server 2003/Server2008 or later

OS supported
MacOS8.6 to 9, MacOSX10.1 or later
100BASE-TX/10BASE-T shielded twisted-pair (STP, Category/

Required network cable: Type5) cable.
Gigabit Ethernet- Category6 cable
Scanner
Scan method Flatbed scanning
B/W: 30 pages/ min.

Scan speed *1 [Scan Size: A4 SEF, compression, Resolution 200 dpi]
ITU-T No.1 Chart
8
Specifications
Maximum power
Less than 900 W
consumption
Image sensor type CCD Image Sensor
Scan types Sheet, book
10/100BASE-TX(TCP/TP)
Interface Ethernet interface (10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX)
IEEE 802.11a/b/g (Wireless LAN),
Resolution B/W: 600 dpi
Variable range of scan

Setting range: 100 dpi - 600 dpi
resolution
*1 Scanning speeds vary according to machine operating conditions, computer (specifications, network
traffic, software, etc.), and original types.
FAX
General
Type: Desktop type transceiver
PSTN
Circuit:
PBX
Connection: Direct couple
Book (Face down):

Maximum Width: 216 mm [8.5 inch]
ARDF (Face up):
(Single-sided document)
Original Size: Length: 139 - 1200 mm [5.5 - 47.2 inch]
Width: 139 - 216 mm [5.5 - 8.5 inch]
(Double-sided document)
Length: 160 - 356 mm [6.3 - 14.0 inch]
Width: 139 - 216 mm [5.5 - 8.5 inch]
9
Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD
G3
8 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)
Resolution:
8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine)
200 x 100 dpi (Standard)
200 x 200 dpi (Detail)
G3: 3 at 28.8Kbps; Measured with G3 ECM using memory for an ITU-T

Transmission Time:
#1 test document (Slerexe letter) at standard resolution
Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Protocol: Group 3 with ECM
V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),

Modulation:
V.27ter (G3), V.8, V.21 (G3)
G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/
Data Rate: 19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Automatic fallback
With ECM: 0 ms/line

I/O Rate:
Without ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line
ECM: 128 KB
SAF
Memory Capacity: Standard: 4 MB
Page Memory:
Standard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)
IFAX Specifications
Local area network

Ethernet 100base-Tx/10base-T
Connectivity:
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
10
Specifications
Main scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi

Resolution: Sub scan: 400 dpi, 200 dpi, 100 dpi
To use 400 dpi, IFAX SW01 Bit 4 must be set to “1”.
1 s (through a LAN to the server)

Condition: ITU-T #1 test document (Selerexe Letter)
MTF correction: OFF
TTI: None
Transmission Time:
Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi
Communication speed: 10 Mbps
Correspondent device: E-mail server
Line conditions: No terminal access
Maximum message width is A4/LT.
Document Size:
• To use B4 and A3 width, IFAX SW00 Bit 1 (B4) and/or Bit 2 (A3) must
be set to “1”.
Single/multi-part
E-mail File Format: MIME conversion
Image: TIFF-F (MH, MR, MMR), JBIG
Transmission:
SMTP, TCP/IP
Protocol:
Reception:
POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
100 Mbps(100base-Tx)
Data Rate:
10 Mbps (10base-T)
SMTP-AUTH
Authentication
POP before SMTP
Method:
A-POP
Remark: The machine must be set up as an e-mail client before installation. Any client
PCs connected to the machine through a LAN must also be e-mail clients, or
some features will not work (e.g. Autorouting).
11
IP-FAX Specifications
Local Area Network

Ethernet/10base-T, 100base-TX
Network:
IEEE1394 (IP over 1394)
IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN)
8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100dpi (standard characters)

Scan line density:
8 x 7.7lines/mm, 200 x 200dpi (detailed characters)
Original size: Maximum A3 or 11"x 17" (DLT)
Standard: A3, 297mm x 432mm

Maximum scanning size:
Irregular: 297mm x 1200mm
Transmission protocol: Recommended: T.38 Annex protocol, TCP, UDP/IP communication
Compatible machines: IP-Fax compatible machines
Specify IP address and send fax to an IP-Fax compatible fax through a

IP-Fax transmission network.
function: Also capable of sending fax from a G3 fax connected to the public
telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.
Receive a fax sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.

IP-Fax reception
function: Also capable of receiving fax from a G3 fax connected the public
telephone lines via a VoIP gateway.
Fax Unit Configuration
Component Code No. Remarks
FCU -
Option for D127
MBU - -
Standard for D128
Speaker -
Handset D645 - NA only.
12
Specifications
ARDF
Standard: A4 to A5; 81/2" x 14" to 81/2" x 51/2"
Custom Width: 139 mm to 216 mm

(Simplex): Length: 139 mm to 1260 mm
Original Size: Custom Width: 139 mm to 216 mm

(Duplex): Length: 160 mm to 356*1 mm
*1: When you use 310 mm or more originals, originals weighing

55k (17 lb. / 64 g/m2) or less cannot be used in duplex
scanning mode.
Original Weight: 52–128 g/m2
50 sheets (80 g/m2, 21 lb.)

Table Capacity:
20 sheets (80 g/m2, 21 lb.)
Original Standard Position: Center
Separation: Friction pad method
Transport: Roller transport
Feed Order: Top first
Reproduction Range: 50–200%
Power Source: T.B.D
Power Consumption: T.B.D
Dimensions (W x D x H): 485 x 450 x 120 mm
Weight: 3kg or less
Paper Tray Unit
A4 SEF, 8½" x 11" SEF, 8½" x 13" SEF,

Paper Sizes:
8½" x 14" SEF
Paper Weight: 60 – 90 g/m2, 16 – 24 lb.
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m2, 21 lb. ) x 1 tray
13
Paper Feed System: Feed roller and friction pad
24 Vdc and 5 Vdc, from copier. If optional tray heater is

Power Source: installed, the copier also supplies Vac (120 Vac or
220 – 240 Vac).
Power Consumption: Maximum: 15 W (excluding optional tray heater)
Average: 14 W (excluding optional tray heater)
Weight: Not above 6 kg (13.2. lb.)
Size (W x D x H): 430 x 414 x 140 mm (16.9" x 16.3" x 5.5")
• 2 units can be installed at maximum. When more than 3 units are installed, SC occurs and the
operation doesn’t work.
14
Supported Paper Sizes

Original Paper Sizes
The copier and ARDF do not detect original paper sizes. The following table lists the paper sizes that the
ARDF can transport.
ARDF
Paper Size (W x L) Book
Simpl. Dupl.
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm – – –
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm – – –
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm X X X
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm –
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm X X X
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm –
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm X X X
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm X X
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm –
B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm –
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm –
8K SEF 267 x 390 mm –
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm X X X
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm –
DLT SEF 11.0" x 17.0" –
LG SEF 8.5" x 14.0" X*1 X X*2
LT SEF 8.5" x 11.0" X X X
LT LEF 11.0" x 8.5" –
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" – X X
15
ARDF
Paper Size (W x L) Book
Simpl. Dupl.
HLT SEF 5.5" x 8.5" X X X
HLT LEF 8.5" x 5.5" X X
F/GL (F4) SEF 8.0" x 13.0" X*1 X X*2
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13.0" X*1 X X*2
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13.0" X*1 X X*2
Government 8.25" x 14" X*1 X X*2
USB4 SEF 10.0" x 14.0" –
Eng Quarto SEF 8.0" x 10.0" – X X*2
Eng Quarto LEF 10.0" x 8.0" –
Width 139-216 mm
Custom: – X*3 X*2, 4
Length 139-356 mm
Symbol meanings:
X: Can use
–: Cannot use
*1: Can be used when the ARDF is installed
*2: 55k (17 lb./ 64 g/m2) or less original cannot be used.
*3: Width: 139-216 mm, Length: 139-1260 mm
*4: Width 139-216 mm, Length: 160-356 mm
Paper Feed
The copier and optional paper feed unit do not detect paper sizes. The following table lists the paper
sizes that the copier and optional paper feed unit can transport.
Paper Size (W x L) Regular By-pass Duplex Optional PFU
A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm – – – –
B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm – – – –
16
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm X X X X
A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm – – – –
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm X X X –
B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm – – – –
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm – X – –
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm X X – –
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm – – – –
B6 LEF 182 x 128 mm – – – –
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm – – – –
8K SEF 267 x 390 mm – – – –
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm X X X –
16K LEF 267 x 195 mm – – – –
DLT SEF 11.0" x 17.0" – – – –
LG SEF 8.5" x 14.0" – X X X
LT SEF 8.5" x 11.0" X X X X
LT LEF 11.0" x 8.5" – – – –
Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" – X – –
HLT SEF 5.5" x 8.5" – X – –
HLT LEF 8.5" x 5.5" X X – –
F/GL (F4) SEF 8.0" x 13.0" – X – –
Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13.0" – X X X
Folio SEF 8.25" x 13.0" – X X X
Government 8.25" x 14" – X X X
Com 10 SEF 4.124” x 9.5” – X – –
Monarch SEF 3.875” x 7.5” – X – –
17
C5 162 x 229 mm – X – –
C6 114 x 162 mm – X – –
DL Env 110 x 220 mm – X – –
Custom: Leading edge 90–216 mm

– X – –
Side edge 139–356 mm
Symbol meanings:
X: Can transport
–: Cannot transport
18
2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance
Tables
Maintenance Tables
Reset the PM counter (SP7-804-001) after doing maintenance work.
RTB 052
Key: AN: As necessary / C: Clean + Inspect / R: Replace
Every
Every 45k Every 90k AN NOTE
120k
OPTICS
Air-using clean
Reflector C DO NOT clean with dry
cloth.
Clean with dry optical

1st - 5th Mirror C
cleaning cloth.
Platen cover C C Dry cloth
Ricoh contact glass cleaner

Exposure glass C C
Dry cloth
DRUM AREA
PCU R Clean toner-bottle holder.
Transfer roller R
Discharge plate R
PAPER FEED
Paper feed roller R C Water or alcohol
Friction pad R C Dry cloth
Bottom-plate pad C C Water or alcohol
Registration roller C C Water or alcohol
FUSING UNIT
19
2. Appendix: Preventive Maintenance Tables
Every
120k
Hot roller R
Pressure roller R
Hot roller bearings R R
Pressure-roller
C R
bushings
Inlet guide C C
Outlet guide C C
Hot roller stripper Clean attached toner.

C C
pawls
Thermistor C C
Every 90k AN NOTE
ARDF
ADF Separation Pad C Dry cloth
Pick-up roller C Damp cloth
Feed roller C Damp cloth
Torque Limiter C (TBA)
PAPER TRAY UNIT
Registration roller C Water or alcohol
Paper feed roller R Water or alcohol
Friction pad R Dry cloth
Bottom-plate pad C Water or alcohol
20
System Service Mode

Service Mode Tables (System SP Tables)
SP1-XXX (Feed)
1001* LE Registration [–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1001 1 All Trays

Adjusts the leading-edge registration ( "Adjusting
1001 2 By-pass Copy Image Area" in the section "Replacement and
Adjustment").
1001 3 Duplex
1002* S-to-S Regist [–9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
1002 1 1st Tray

Adjusts the side-to-side registration ( "Adjusting
1002 2 2nd Tray Copy Image Area" in the section "Replacement and
Adjustment"). SP1-002-001 is applied to all trays.
1002 3 3rd Tray SP1-002-002, 003 and 005 adjusts the difference
from SP1-002-001.
1002 4 By-pass
Adjusts the side-to-side registration of the 2nd side in

1002 5 Duplex duplex copying. The 1st side is adjusted by
SP1-002-001 through 005.
Adjusts the amount of paper buckle on the registration

1003* Paper Feed Timing
roller.
1003 1 1st tray
1003 2 Bank Trays

[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
1003 3 By-pass
1003 4 Duplex
21
1103* Fusing Idling
Fusing Idling [0 = No / 1 = Yes]

1103 1
Enables or disables the contact-release control.
Reload Temp: Center [90 to 140 / 120 / 1 °C/step]

1103 2
Sets the degree at which or less reload becomes ON.
Threshold [60 to 160 / 100 / 1 °C/step]

1103 3
Sets threshold-degree for switching forced reload to temperature-judging reload.
Fusing Temperature Adjustment

1105* Adjusts the target fusing temperature. Note that the thermistor is at the center of the hot
roller.
1105 1 Roller Center: Plain1

[120 to 200 / 140 / 1 °C/step]
1105 3 Roller Center: Plain2
1105 5 Roller Center: M - Thick [120 to 200 / 145 / 1 °C/step]
Thick Paper – Roller Center [0 to 40 / 10 / 1 °C/step]
1105 7 Sets the additional temperature to SP1105-001’s degree for thick paper print.
(i.e.: SP1105-001= 140, This SP= 10, 140+10= 150 degree)
Center Minus: Thin [0 to 20 / 5 / 1 °C/step]
1105 9 Sets the subtractive temperature to SP1105-001’s degree for thin paper print.
(i.e.: SP1105-001= 140, This SP= 5, 140-5= 135 degree)
Energy Saver [0 to 80 / 60 / 1 °C/step]

1105 11
Sets the fusing temperature on energy saving mode.
1105 12 Wait Temp: Center [140 to 160 / 150 / 1 °C/step]
1105 13 Print Ready [140 to 180 / 160 / 1 °C/step]
Thresh: S1 [0 to 50 / 16 / 1 °C/step]
1105 14 Sets standard temperature used for the environment judge.
*About the judge, refer to SP1105-015.
22
System Service Mode
Thresh: delta t [0 to 50 / 0 / 1 °C/step]
The environment judge takes place as follows:

Compared with “S1” and “S1+Delta t”, the environment temp. is…
(S1: SP1105-014 value / Delta t: This SP’s value)
1105 15
S1 Less or equal Greater Greater
S1+Delta t Less Less or equal Greater
Judged as Low temp. Normal temp. High temp.
1105 16 Low: Plain1 [0 to 30 / 5 / 1 °C/step]

Sets the additional degree for each paper
1105 17 Low: Plain2
type printing under low temperature
environment.
1105 18 Low: M-Thick *Refer to SP1105-015 about the environment
judge.
[0 to 30 / 10 / 1 °C/step]
1105 19 Low: Thick
The same function as SP1105 (-017 to -18)
1105 20 Registration Waiting: Plain1 [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

1105 21 Registration Waiting: Plain2 (0: OFF / 1: ON)
Registration waiting means keeping fed paper
1105 22 Registration Waiting: M - Thick
in the registration part until fusing unit is ready
1105 23 Registration Waiting: Thick to work.
1105 24 Waiting: Center Minus: Plain1 [0 to 60 / 30 / 1 °C/step]

Subtracting temp. applying to
1105 26 Waiting: Center Minus: Plain2 SP1105-001,002. The sum at which or less,
registration waiting starts.
1105 28 Waiting: Center Minus: M - Thick [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 °C/step]
1105 30 Waiting: Center Minus: Thick The same function as SP1105 (-024, -26)
23
1105 32 Waiting: Center Upper: Plain1

[0 to 60 / 40 / 1 °C/step]
1105 34 Waiting: Center Upper: Plain2
Additional value to each paper type setting
1105 36 Waiting: Center Upper: M - Thick temp.. The sum at which or less, registration
waiting starts.
1105 38 Waiting Center Upper: Thick
1106 Fusing Temperature Display
1106 1 Roller Center [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 °C/step]
In The Machine at Power On [-20 to 250 / 0 / 1 °C/step]

1106 3
Displays the thermistor temp. at power on.
1108* Control Period Setting
1108 1 Warming-up [100 to 2000 / 100 / 100 msec/step]
1108 2 Print [100 to 2000 / 1000 / 100 msec/step]
1108 3 Wait [100 to 2000 / 1000 / 100 msec/step]
1108 4 Print Start [100 to 2000 / 200 / 100 msec/step]
1108 5 Print Start Time [0 to 999 / 5 / 1 sec/step]
1112 Image Process Temp. Correction
1112 1 Temp.: Normal: Level1 [-25 to 10 / 0 / 1 °C/step]
1112 2 Temp.: Normal: Level2 Sets the additional temperature
1124 CPM Down Setting
Low: Down Temp [-50 to 0 / -25 / 1 °C/step]

1124 1
Sets the temperature for the trigger of CPM down.
Low: Up Temp [-50 to 0 / -5 / 1 °C/step]

1124 2
Sets the temperature for the trigger of CPM up.
24
System Service Mode
Low: 1st CPM [10 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step]

1124 3
Sets the rate for CPM down. (Low Temp.)
Low: 2nd CPM [10 to 100 / 60 / 1 %/step]

1124 4
The same function as -003, -005
Low: 3rd CPM [10 to 100 / 40 / 1 %/step]

1124 5
High: 1st CPM [10 to 100 / 65 / 1 %/step]

1124 6
Sets the rate for CPM down. (High Temp.)
High: 2nd CPM [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]

1124 7
High: 3rd CPM [10 to 100 / 50 / 1 %/step]

1124 8
1124 9 High: 1st CPM Down Time.: LT
1124 10 High: 2nd CPM Down Time.: LT [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sec/step]

1124 11 High: 3rd CPM Down Time.: LT After motor driving start, CPM (High temp.)
gets one step down in SP’s value sec later
1124 12 High: 1st CPM Down Time.: A4 for each paper size.
1124 13 High: 2nd CPM Down Time.: A4 (SP-9 to -23)
1124 14 High: 3rd CPM Down Time.: A4
1124 15 High: 1st CPM Down Time.: B5 [0 to 999 / 120 / 1 sec/step]
1124 16 High: 2nd CPM Down Time.: B5 [0 to 999 / 1 / 1 sec/step]
1124 17 High: 3rd CPM Down Time.: B5 [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
1124 18 High: 1st CPM Down Time.: A5 [0 to 999 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
1124 19 High: 2nd CPM Down Time.: A5 [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
1124 20 High: 3rd CPM Down Time.: A5 [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
1124 21 High: 1st CPM Down Time.: A6 [0 to 999 / 60 / 1 sec/step]
1124 22 High: 2nd CPM Down Time.: A6 [0 to 999 / 1 / 1 sec/step]
25
1124 23 High: 3rd CPM Down Time.: A6 [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sec/step]
Judging Interval [1 to 999 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

1124 24
For CPM down (Low temp.)
Start Timing [1 to 999 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

1124 25
After motor driving start, CPM down judge starts in SP’s value sec later. (Low temp.)
1152 Fusing Nip Band Check By-pass
Check By-pass
1152 1
Execution type SP
Pre-idling Time [0 to 999 / 300 /1 sec/step]

1152 2
Sets the duration of idling before the check takes place.
Stop Time [0 to 100 / 20 / 1 sec/step]

1152 3
Sets the duration of the check.
1159* Fusing Jam Detection
SC Display [0 = No / 1 = Yes]
1159 1 Enables or disables consecutive jam detection at the fusing unit. If this SP is set to "1"
(default: 0), consecutive fusing jam alarm occurs (SC559) when the machine detects
three consecutive paper jams at the fusing unit.
1902 Frequency
Displays the fusing lamp power control frequency (as detected by the zero cross signal
1902 1
generator).
1907 Paper Pre Feed Timing
1907 20 F2 Tray
1907 21 F3 Tray [-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

The larger value set, the larger area of the paper
1907 22 F2 Tray is pre-fed for each tray.
1907 23 F3 Tray
26
System Service Mode
1950 Fan Cooling Time Set
Fusing Exit Fan [0 to 900 / 10 / 1 sec/step]

1950 1
Sets the duration of the fusing exit fun on waiting and abnormal condition.
1951 Fan start Time Set
Fusing Exit Fan [0 to 900 / 60 / 1 sec/step]

1951 1
Sets the time before fan operates at startup.
1952 Fan Control Off Mode Time Set
Fusing Exit Fan [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 min/step]

1952 1
Sets the time before fan operates at startup from sleep mode.
1991 Max Fusing Lamp Duty
1991 1 Roller Center

[40 to 100 / 100 / 10%/step]
1991 3 After Warming-Up -- Center
1996 Heater Forced Off
After Printing [0 to 120 / 7 / 1 sec/step]

1996 5
Sets the wait time before the heater will be forced off after printing.
SP2-XXX (Drum)
2001* Charge Roller Bias Adjust
Setting (Copying) [–2100 to –1500 / –1700 / 10 V/step]
Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for printing. The voltage changes
2001 1 automatically as charge-roller voltage control works. The value here is the base value
for the charge-roller voltage control.
The value from -1800 V to -1600 V is preferable.
27
ID sensor pattern [0 to 400 / 200 / 10 V/step]
2001 2 Adjusts the voltage applied to the charge roller for the ID sensor pattern (as part of
charge-roller voltage correction). Setting the same value as “SP2-201-002” is
preferable.
Temporally Input [-2500 to 0 / 0 / 10 V/step]
2001 3 Inputs the voltage value. Too small value may cause the charge roller tainted. Too large
value may cause attaching carrier particles in developer, on a printed paper. The value
from – 1800 V to 1600 V is preferable.
2005* Charge Bias Correction
2005 1 Vsdp Min [0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step]
2005 2 Vsdp Max [0 to 100 / 95 / 1 %/step]
Charge Roller Bias Correction (Step) [0 to 200 / 50 / 1 V/step]

2005 3
Sets correction value by one step for bias adjustment to meet SP2001-001 setting value.
2102* Main Scan Adj.
2102 1 Magnification Adj. [-0.5 to 0.5 / 0 / 0.1%/step]
2102 13 Beam Pitch Dot [0 to 20 / 5 / 1 dot/step]
2005 14 Beam Pitch Subdot [0 to 15 / 3 / 1 sub-dot/step]
2103* Erase Margin Adj.
2103 1 Leading Edge

[0 to 4 / 3 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 2 Trailing Edge
2103 3 Left
[0 to 4 / 2 / 0.1 mm/step]
2103 4 Right
2104* Unit LD Power Adj.
2104 1 LD1
[60 to 140 / 100 / 0.1 %/step]
2104 2 LD2
28
System Service Mode
2105* LD Power Adjustment
2105 1 [60 to 140 / 100 / 0.1 %/step]
2109* Test Pattern
Pattern Select
This SP has the test patterns as below.
0 None 13 Independent Pattern (4dot)
1 Vertical Line (1dot) 14 Trimming Area
2 Vertical Line (2dot) 15 Hound’s Tooth Check (Horizontal)
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 16 Hound’s Tooth Check (Vertical)
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 17 Black Band (Horizontal)
2109 1 5 Grid Vertical Line 18 Black Band (vertical)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 19 Checker Flag Pattern
7 Grid Pattern Small 20 Grayscale (Vertical)
8 Grid Pattern Large 21 Grayscale (Horizontal)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 22 Two Beam Density Pattern
10 Argyle Pattern Large 23 Full Dot Pattern
11 Independent Pattern (1dot) 24 All White pattern
12 Independent Pattern (2dot)
Pattern Density [0 to 15 / 15 / 1 /step]

2109 2
Sets the density applying to test patterns
LD Power Adj.
2152*
Adjusts each area LD power. Higher becomes stronger LD. Lower becomes dimmed.
2152 1 LD1 Area 0 [75 to 125 / 100 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 2 LD1 Area 1 [75 to 125 / 79.9 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 3 LD1 Area 2 [75 to 125 / 79.9 / 0.1 %/step]
29
2152 4 LD1 Area 3 [75 to 125 / 79.9 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 5 LD1 Area 4 [75 to 125 / 82.2 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 6 LD1 Area 5 [75 to 125 / 84.3 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 7 LD1 Area 6 [75 to 125 / 86.3 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 8 LD1 Area 7 [75 to 125 / 88.2 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 9 LD1 Area 8 [75 to 125 / 89.9 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 10 LD1 Area 9 [75 to 125 / 91.5 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 11 LD1 Area 10 [75 to 125 / 93 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 12 LD1 Area 11 [75 to 125 / 94.3 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 13 LD1 Area 12 [75 to 125 / 95.5 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 14 LD1 Area 13 [75 to 125 / 96.6 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 15 LD1 Area 14 [75 to 125 / 97.5 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 16 LD1 Area 15 [75 to 125 / 98.3 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 17 LD1 Area 16 [75 to 125 / 99 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 18 LD1 Area 17 [75 to 125 / 99.6 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 19 LD1 Area 18 [75 to 125 / 100 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 20 LD1 Area 19 [75 to 125 / 100.3 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 21 LD1 Area 20 [75 to 125 / 100.4 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 22 LD1 Area 21 [75 to 125 / 100.5 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 23 LD1 Area 22 [75 to 125 / 100.4 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 24 LD1 Area 23 [75 to 125 / 100.1 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 25 LD1 Area 24 [75 to 125 / 99.8 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 26 LD1 Area 25 [75 to 125 / 99.3 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 27 LD1 Area 26 [75 to 125 / 98.6 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 28 LD1 Area 27 [75 to 125 / 97.9 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 29 LD1 Area 28 [75 to 125 / 97 / 0.1 %/step]
30
System Service Mode
2152 30 LD1 Area 29 [75 to 125 / 96 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 31 LD1 Area 30 [75 to 125 / 94.8 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 32 LD1 Area 31 [75 to 125 / 93.5 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 33 LD2 Area 0 [75 to 125 / 100 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 34 LD2 Area 1 [75 to 125 / 82 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 35 LD2 Area 2 [75 to 125 / 82 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 36 LD2 Area 3 [75 to 125 / 82 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 37 LD2 Area 4 [75 to 125 / 84 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 38 LD2 Area 5 [75 to 125 / 85.8 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 39 LD2 Area 6 [75 to 125 / 87.6 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 40 LD2 Area 7 [75 to 125 / 89.2 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 41 LD2 Area 8 [75 to 125 / 90.7 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 42 LD2 Area 9 [75 to 125 / 92.1 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 43 LD2 Area 10 [75 to 125 / 93.4 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 44 LD2 Area 11 [75 to 125 / 94.7 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 45 LD2 Area 12 [75 to 125 / 95.7 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 46 LD2 Area 13 [75 to 125 / 96.7 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 47 LD2 Area 14 [75 to 125 / 97.6 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 48 LD2 Area 15 [75 to 125 / 98.4 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 49 LD2 Area 16 [75 to 125 / 99 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 50 LD2 Area 17 [75 to 125 / 99.6 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 51 LD2 Area 18 [75 to 125 / 100.1 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 52 LD2 Area 19 [75 to 125 / 100.4 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 53 LD2 Area 20 [75 to 125 / 100.6 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 54 LD2 Area 21 [75 to 125 / 100.8 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 55 LD2 Area 22 [75 to 125 / 100.8 / 0.1 %/step]
31
2152 56 LD2 Area 23 [75 to 125 / 100.7 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 57 LD2 Area 24 [75 to 125 / 100.5 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 58 LD2 Area 25 [75 to 125 / 100.2 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 59 LD2 Area 26 [75 to 125 / 99.8 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 60 LD2 Area 27 [75 to 125 / 99.3 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 61 LD2 Area 28 [75 to 125 / 98.7 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 62 LD2 Area 29 [75 to 125 / 97.9 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 63 LD2 Area 30 [75 to 125 / 97.1 / 0.1 %/step]
2152 64 LD2 Area 31 [75 to 125 / 96.2 / 0.1 %/step]
2201* Development Bias Adjust
Printing [–1500 to –200 / –650 / 10 /step = 1V]
2201 1 Adjusts the voltage applied to the development roller for printing. Image density
becomes higher when you specify a smaller value (a greater absolute value). Image
density becomes lower when you specify a greater value (a smaller absolute value).
ID sensor pattern
[ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
(0:N 1:H 2:L 3:HH 4:LL)
2201 2
Adjusts the toner density control of the developer case.
[0= Normal / 1= Thick / 2= Thin / 3= More thick / 4= More thin]
ID sensor pattern
2201 3 [-700 to -300 / -420 / 10 V/step]
(Temporally Input)
2210 Bias Off Time
2210 1 Charge Bias [10 to 150 / 100 / 10 /step]
2210 2 Development Bias [10 to 200 / 80 10 /step]
2211 PCU Reverse Interval [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheet/step]
2211 1 This value affects how many sheets are copied continuously before PCU reversing.
32
System Service Mode
2213 Copies After Toner Near End
After “Toner Near End” detected, this value affects how many sheets are copied before
2213 1 “Toner End” will occur.
[0= 50 sheets / 1= 20 sheets]
2220 Vsg / Vsp / Vsdp / Vt / Vtref Dilay
2220 1 Vsp
2220 2 Vsg
2220 3 Vsdp Displays each value.
2220 4 Vt
2220 5 Vtref
2224 Copies After Toner Near End Counter
[0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step] RTB 46

2224 1
The counter applying to “SP2-213-1”
Transfer Current Adjust

2301*
Adjusts the current applied to the transfer roller.
33
2301 1 Thin: 1side: Image Area
2301 2 Thin: 1side: Lead Edge
2301 3 Thin: 1side: Trail Edge
2301 4 Thin: 2side: Image Area
2301 5 Thin: 2side: Lead Edge
2301 6 Thin: 2side: Trail Edge
2301 7 Plain: 1side: Image Area
2301 8 Plain: 1side: Lead Edge
2301 9 Plain: 1side: Trail Edge [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
2301 10 Plain: 2side: Image Area Each value suggests as follows:

0: -2 A (Default)
2301 11 Plain: 2side: Lead Edge
1: 0 A
2301 12 Plain: 2side: Trail Edge 2: +2 A
2301 13 Middle: 1side: Image Area 3: +4 A
2301 14 Middle: 1side: Lead Edge
2301 15 Middle: 1side: Trail Edge
2301 16 Middle: 2side: Image Area
2301 17 Middle: 2side: Lead Edge
2301 18 Middle: 2side: Trail Edge
2301 19 Thick: 1side: Image Area
2301 20 Thick: 1side: Lead Edge
2301 21 Thick: 1side: Trail Edge
2301 22 Input: 1side

[0 to 30 / 0 / 1 A/step]
2301 23 Input: 2side
Temp Inside the Machine [-25 to 55 / 20 / 1 A/step]

2301 25
This temp affects transfer current value.
34
System Service Mode
Non Image Area: LL [0 to 30 / 10 / 1 A/step]
2301 26 Output current under low temperature condition.
*Refer to SP1105-015 about the condition judge.
Non Image Area: MM [0 to 30 / 13 / 1 A/step]
2301 27 Output current under normal temperature condition.
Non Image Area: HH [0 to 30 / 15 / 1 A/step]
2301 28 Output current under high temperature condition.
2302* Transfer Current Switch Timing
2302 1 Lead Edge

[-10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
2302 2 Trail Edge
Transfer Roller Cleaning Bias

2303* Increasing positive or negative current that improves clear of the same charged toner but
attracts the opposite charged one.
2303 1 Positive
[0 to 20 / 10 / 1 A/step]
2303 2 Negative
2308* Transfer Voltage Upper Limiter
0: OFF 1: ON
2308 1
The switch of the limiter for transfer voltage.
2801* Developer Initialization
2801 1 Execute in the case of PCU replacement.
2802 Developer Mixing
35
Initializes the developer and checks the TD sensor output (Vt). The machine mixes the
developer for 2 minutes while reading and displaying the Vt value. The machine does
2802 1 not initialize the TD sensor output. If the machine has not been used for a long period,
prints may have a dirty background. In a case like this, use this SP to mix the developer.
The message "Completed" is displayed when the program ends normally.
Displays each value at the time of initialization

2803* Developer Initialization Data
completed.
2803 1 Vts [0 to 9.99 / 2.4 / 0.01 V/step]
2803 2 ID Sensor PWM Value [0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 /step]
2901* Separation Voltage Adjust
2901 1 1side: Lead Edge
2901 2 1side: Image Area [0 to 4000 / 0 / -100 V/step]

Adjusting image area or too much value (bias)
2901 3 2side: Lead Edge setting may cause dust problem.
2901 4 2side: Image Area
2901 5 Switching Timing Lead Edge [-20 to 20 / 15 / 1 mm/step]
2906* Tailing Control
Shift Range [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

2906 1 Shifts the image position. When the copier is continuously printing vertical lines (such as
in tables), the paper may not separate correctly. This SP can prevent this.
Number of Sheets [1 to 10 / 1 / 1 sheet/step]

2906 2 Changes the number of sheet(s) under tailing control with the shift range specified by
SP2-906-001.
2908 Forced Toner Supply
Supplies the toner to the development unit. The processing stops under either of the
following conditions:
2908 1
• The toner density in the development unit reaches the standard level.
• The processing has continued for two 2 minutes.
36
System Service Mode
2915* Polygon Motor Idling Time
2915 1 Idling Time ADJ [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 sec/step]]

Adjusts before or after printing polygon motor
2915 2 Post Idling Time ADJ idling time.
2921* Toner Supply Mode
[0: Normal 1 / 1: Normal 2 / 2: Fixed 1 / 3: Fixed 2]

2921 1 Selects the toner supply mode. Keep the default setting as long as the TD sensor is
working normally. (Default= 0)
2922* Toner Supply Time [0.1 to 5.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 sec/step]
Adjusts the toner supply time. The toner supply motor remains on for the specified time.
2922 1 Specify a greater value if the user tends to make many copies having high proportions of
solid black image areas.
2923* Toner Recovery Time [1 to 60 / 30 / 1 sec/step]
Adjusts the toner supply time under the condition of “Toner End” or “Toner Near End”
2923 1
detected.
2925* Toner Supply Ratio [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]
The ratio adjustment SP available only when “SP2-921-1” setting is “2 (Fixed1)”. Each
value represents as follows:
0: x1
1: x2
2: x4
2925 1
3: x8
4: x12
5: x16
6: Continuously supply
7: No supply
2926* Standard Vt [0.00 to 5.00 / 2.4 / 0.05 V/step] DFU
37
Adjusts Vts (the Vt value for new developer). The TD sensor output is adjusted to this
2926 1
value during the TD sensor initial setting process.
2927* ID Sensor Control [0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Determines whether the ID sensor signal is referenced or not for the toner density control.
2927 1
Keep the default value in usual operations.
2928 Toner End Clear
Clears the following messages and counters without supplying the toner:
• Toner near end message
• Toner end message
2928 1 • Copies After Toner Near End Counter (SP2-224-001)
Do not use this SP in usual operations. When the toner in the development unit is
abnormally insufficient, the drum may attract the toner carrier to its surface. The toner
carrier damages the drum surface.
2929* Vref Adjustment Adjust the upper or lower Vref limit.
2929 1 Upper Limit [0.50 to 3.50 / 2.40 / 0.05 V/step] DFU
2929 2 Lower Limit [0.50 to 3.50 / 0.50 / 0.05 V/step] DFU
2930* TD Sensor Manual Setting [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.00 / 0.05 V/step]
Inputs Vtref directly.

2930 1
“SP2-926-001” becomes invalid when this value is set.
2931* TD (V/wt%) Setting [0.01 to 1.50 / 0.40 / 0.01 /step]
Adjusts the timing of toner supplying. The more frequently toner is supplied under the
2931 1
smaller value. DO NOT use this SP in usual operations.
2932* Toner Density Control Level [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
[ 0=Normal / 1=Dark / 2=Light / 3=Darker / 4=Lighter ]

2932 1
This SP isn’t valid unless “SP2-921-001” setting is 1=Normal2.
38
System Service Mode
2933* ID Sensor Control Correction [0.5 to 3 / 1 / 0.1 /step]
2933 1 For Adjustment of ID sensor correction value. DO NOT use this SP in usual operations.
2934* ID Sensor PMW Setting
2934 1 Dilay [0 to 1023 / 200 / 1 /step]
Upper Limit Correction [0 to 1023 / 100 / 1 /step]

2934 2
Sets PMW upper limit.
2935* ID Sensor Initialization
Use this SP after ID Sensor replacement. This Operates PWM value clearing, Vsg re-
2935 1
adjustment, and PWM re-adjustment.
2936* ID Sensor Detection Interval Counter
[0 to 999 / 0 / 1 page/step]
2936 1
The counter applying to “SP2-995-002”.
Copies After TD Sensor Error

2992* “SP2992-002” is for “SP2992-001”. SC will occur after copying the number of sheets
chosen at “SP2992-001”.
2992 1 0= 100pages 1= 200pages -
2992 2 Counter [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
2995* ID Sensor Detection Interval
Warming-up [0 to 999 / 480 / 1 min/step]

2995 1 After energy saving mode activates, ID sensor warming-up will take place in this SP’s
value min later.
Number of Pages [0 to 999 / 100 / 1 sheet/step]

2995 2 Sets the number of pages as the trigger of “SP2-995-003” setting action. (Counter:
“SP2936-001”)
39
JobEnd / Interrupt -
2995 3
Sets the condition at which ID sensor control takes place.
2996* Transfer Roller Cleaning [0 = No / 1 = Yes]
Cleans or does not clean the transfer roller before each job. Select “1” if the backside of
the paper becomes unclean when output. Note that the copier takes a longer time to
2996 1
output the first copy when you select “1”. If you select “0”, the transfer roller is never
cleaned.
Interval [0 to 100 / 50 / 1 /step]

2996 2 When the “SP2-996-003” counter is over this SP’s value, Transfer roller cleaning is
activated on the Job-End timing. If this SP’s value is 0, cleaning doesn’t act.
Counter [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

2996 3
The counter Applying to “SP2996-002” (Interval).
2998* PCU Reverse Rotation Time
2998 1 Wait Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 /step= 30ms]
2998 2 Reverse Time [0 to 99 / 60 / 1 /step= 6ms]
Brake Time [0 to 99 / 0 / 1 /step= 3ms]

2998 3
DO NOT use this SP in usual operations.
SP4-XXX (Scanner)
4008* SubScan Mag Adjustment [-1.0 to +1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 %/step]
Adjusts the sub-scan magnification ( "Adjusting Copy Image Area" in the section
4008 1
4010* L – Edge Regist Adjustment [–1.0 to +1.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Adjusts the leading edge registration ( "Adjusting Copy Image Area" in the section
4010 1
4011* S-to-S Regist Adjustment [–2.0 to +2.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
40
System Service Mode
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for scanning in platen mode ( "Adjusting Copy
4011 1
Image Area" in the section "Replacement and Adjustment").
4012* Scan Erase Margin: Scale [0 to 3.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4012 1 Book: Leading Edge
4012 2 Book: Trailing Edge Adjusts the scanning margin. Generally, the scanning
4012 3 Book: Left Side margin should be as little as possible.
4012 4 Book: Right Side
Conducts the scanner free run with the exposure

4013 Scanner Free Run
lamp on.
4013 1 Lamp Off
4013 2 Lamp On
4014 Scan
4014 1 HP Detection Enable
4014 2 HP Detection Disable
4014 3 HP Detection Enable FC 600 dpi
4014 4 HP Detection Enable BW 600 dpi
4014 5 HP Detection Enable FC 1200dpi
4016* DF Scan
4016 1 FC 600x300 Duplex
4016 2 BW 600x300 Duplex
4016 3 FC 600x600 Duplex
4016 4 BW 600x600 Duplex
4016 5 FC 600x200 Duplex
4016 6 FC 600x300 Simplex
41
4016 7 BW 600x300 Simplex
4016 8 FC 600x600 Simplex
4016 9 BW 600x600 Simplex
4016 10 FC 600x200 Simplex
Dust Check
4020*
DF dust check function
4020 1 Dust Detect: ON / OFF [0= OFF or 1= ON / 0 ]
Dust Detect: Lvl [0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]

4020 2
The larger value is set, the more sensitive the detection becomes.
Dust Reject: Lvl [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
4020 3 0=OFF
The larger value is set, the stronger the correction becomes.
4400* Scanner Erase Margin [0 to 3 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step]
4400 1 Book Leading Edge
4400 2 Book Trailing Edge Adjusts the mask range against shade on each part
4400 3 Book Left of the original.
4400 4 Book Right
4400 5 Trailing Edge
4400 7 Left Adjusts the mask range for ADF copying.
4400 8 Right
4417* IPU Test Pattern
4417 1 This SP has the test patterns as below.
0 Scanned image 15 Gray pattern (1)
1 Gradation main scan A 16 Gray pattern (2)
42
System Service Mode
2 Gradation main scan B 17 Gray pattern (3)
3 18 Shading pattern
None
4 29 Thin line pattern
5 Gradation sub scan (1) 20 Scanned+Grid pattern
6 Grid pattern (1) 21 None
7 Slant grid pattern 22 Scanned+Color patch
8 Gradation K 23 Scanned+Slant Grid C
9 None 24 None
10 Gray patch 16 (1) 25 Gray scale 18 text
11 Gray patch 16 (2) 26 Gray scale 18 photo
12 Gray patch 64 27 Gray scale 256 text
13 Grid pattern (2) 28 Gray scale 256 photo
14 Color patch K
4429 Select Copy Data Security [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]
4429 1 Copying
The larger value, the stronger the density becomes
4429 2 Scanning
for coping originals forbidden to be duplicated.
4429 3 Fax Operation
4450 Scan Image Pass Selection [0 or 1 / 0]
4450 1 Black Subtraction ON/OFF
4450 2 SH ON/OFF
4460 Digital AE
Low Limit Value [0 to 1023 / 364 / 1 /step]

4460 1 The threshold value detected on platen sheet check. The larger (lighter) value area on
scanned image than this SP’s value is detected as white sheet area (background).
43
4460 2 Background level [512 to 1535 / 932 / 1 /step]
4550 Scan Apli:Txt/Print
4551* Scan Application: Txt
4552* Scan Application: Txt Dropout
4553* Scan Application: Txt/Photo

These SPs have the same lower level
4554* Scan Application: Photo
settings as below.
4565* Scan Application: GrayScale
4570* Scan Application: Color Txt/Photo
4571* Scan Application: Color Gloss Photo
4572* Scan Application: AutoColor
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
005 MTF 0= (Off)
1 – 15= (Weak – Strong)
[0 to 7/ 4 / 1 /step]
006 Smoothing 0= (x1)
007 Brightness
[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
008 Contrast
[0 to 7/ 0 / 1 /step]
Ind Dot Erase
009 0= (x1)
(Independent Dot Erase)
44
System Service Mode
4580* Fax Application: Txt/Chart
4581* Fax Application: Txt

These SPs have mostly common lower
4582* Fax Application: Txt/Photo level settings as below.
4583* Fax Application: Photo (“SP4581”,”4584”,”4585” don’t

have “-010”)
4584* Fax Application: Original 1
4585* Fax Application: Original 2
[0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]
005 MTF 0= (Off)
1 – 15=(Weak – Strong)
[0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]
006 Smoothing 0= (x1)
007 Brightness
[1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]
008 Contrast
[0 to 7 / 0 / 1 /step]
Ind Dot Erase
009 0= (Off)
(Independent Dot Erase)
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
010 Texture Erase
0= (Fix)
4603* AGC Execution
4603 1 HP Detection Enable

Execution type SP
4603 2 HP Detection Disable
4604* FGATE
4604 1 Open/Close [ON or OFF]
4606* White Level Adjust
4606 1 Color 600 [0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]
45
4607 1 Color 1200 [0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]
4608 1 BK [0 to 1024 / 784 / 1 digit/step]
4609* Gray Balance Set: R
4609 1 Book Scan

[-512 to 511 / -89 / 1 digit/step]
4609 2 DF Scan
4610* Gray Balance Set: G
4610 1 Book Scan

[-512 to 511 / -76 / 1 digit/step]
4610 2 DF Scan
4610 3 BW Book Scan

[-512 to 511 / -92 / 1 digit/step]
4610 4 BW DF Scan
4611* Gray Balance Set: B
4611 1 Book Scan

[-512 to 511 / -85 / 1 digit/step]
4611 2 DF Scan
4623* Black Level Adj. Display
4623 1 Latest: R Color 600

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
46
System Service Mode
4624 1 Latest: G Color 600

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4624 1 Latest: BK E
4624 2 Latest: BK O
4625 1 Latest: B Color 600

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4631* Display Gain Adjust

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4632 3 Latest: BK E
4632 4 Latest: BK O

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4645* Scan Adjust Error
4645 1 White level

[0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
4645 2 Black level
4647* Scanner Hard Error
47
4647 1 Power - ON [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
4654 1 Last Correct Value: R Color 600

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4654 2 Last Correct Value: R Color1200
4655 1 Last Correct Value: G Color 600
4655 2 Last Correct Value: G Color1200

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4655 3 Last Correct Value: BK E
4655 4 Last Correct Value: BK O
4656 1 Last Correct Value: B Color 600

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4656 2 Last Correct Value: B Color1200
4661* Digital Gain Adjust
4661 1 Last Correct Value : R Color 600

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4661 2 Last Correct Value : R Color1200
4662 1 Last Correct Value: G Color 600
4662 2 Last Correct Value: G Color1200

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4662 3 Last Correct Value: BK E
4662 4 Last Correct Value: BK O
48
System Service Mode
4663 1 Last Correct Value: B Color 600

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4663 2 Last Correct Value: B Color1200
4673 1 Factory Setting: R Color 600

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4673 2 Factory Setting: R Color1200
4674 1 Factory Setting: G Color 600
4674 2 Factory Setting: Color1200

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4674 3 Factory Setting: BK E
4674 4 Factory Setting: BK O
4675 1 Factory Setting: B Color 600

[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4675 2 Factory Setting: B Color1200
4680 1 Factory setting: R Color 600

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4680 2 Factory setting: R Color1200
4681 1 Factory setting: G Color 600
4681 2 Factory setting: G Color1200

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4681 3 Factory setting: BK E
4681 4 Factory setting: BK O
49
4682 1 Factory setting: B Color 600

[0 to 511 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4682 2 Factory setting: B Color1200
4688* ADF Adjustment
4688 1 Density [50 to 150 / 100 / 1 %/step]
4690* White Level Peak Read: R
4690 1 R Color 600

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4690 2 R Color1200
4691* White Level Peak Read: G
4691 1 G Color 600
4691 2 G Color1200
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4691 3 BK E
4691 4 BK O
4692* White Level Peak Read: B
4692 1 B Color 600

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4692 2 B Color1200
4693* Black Level Peak Read: R
4693 1 R Color 600

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4693 2 R Color1200
4694* Black Level Peak Read: G
50
System Service Mode
4694 1 G Color 600
4694 2 G Color1200
[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4694 3 BK E
4694 4 BK O
4695* Black Level Peak Read: B
4695 1 B Color 600

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4695 2 B Color1200
4802* DF Shading FreeRun
4802 1 Lamp OFF

[0: OFF / 1: ON]
4802 2 Lamp ON
4804* Home Position
4804 1 Home Position Execution type SP
4806* Carriage Save
4806 1 Carriage Save Execution type SP
4808* Factory Setting Input
4808 2 Execution Flag [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
4810* PWM Latest
4810 1 Latest: Color 600
4810 2 Latest: Color 1200 [0 to 4412 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4810 3 Latest: Bk
51
4810 4 Last Correct Value Color 600
4810 5 Last Correct Value Color 1200 [0 to 4412 / 3152 / 1 digit/step]
4810 6 Last Correct Value Bk
4810 7 Factory Setting: Color 600
4810 8 Factory Setting: Color 1200 [0 to 4412 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4810 9 Factory Setting: Bk
4811* LED White Level Peak Read

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4811 5 Latest: BkE
4811 6 Latest: BkO
4812* LED White Level Peak Read

[0 to 1023 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4812 5 Factory Setting: BkE
4812 6 Factory Setting: BkO
52
System Service Mode
4813* LED White Level Adjust
4813 1 Color 600

[0 to 1023 / 784 / 1 digit/step]
4813 2 Color 1200
4813 3 Bk [0 to 1023 / 540 / 1 digit/step]
4903* Filter Setting
4903 1 Ind Dot Erase: Text [0 to 7 / 0 / 1 digit/step]
4903 2 Ind Dot Erase: Generation Copy Independent Dot Erase
4905* Select Gradation Level [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Adjusts the graduation level applying to copy application. Default (0) is optimal
4905 1
parameter.
4909* Man Gamma:P ColK
4909 1 Offset: Highlight
4909 2 Offset: Middle

[0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step]
4909 3 Offset: Shadow
4909 4 Offset: IDmax
4909 5 Option: Highlight [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4909 6 Option: Middle [0 to 12 / 0 / 1 /step]
4909 7 Option: Shadow [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4909 8 Option: IDmax [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4914* Man Gamma: T: ColK
4914 1 Offset: Highlight
4914 2 Offset: Middle

[0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step]
4914 3 Offset: Shadow
4914 4 Offset: IDmax
53
4914 5 Option: Highlight [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4914 6 Option: Middle [0 to 12 / 0 / 1 /step]
4914 7 Option: Shadow [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4914 8 Option: IDmax [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4918* Man Gamma Adj
4918 9 Touch [Change] displayed.
4954* Read/Restore Std
4954 1 Read New Chart
4954 2 Recall Prev chart Execution type SP
4954 4 Set std chart
4954 5 Chromaticity Rank [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
4991* IPU Image Pass Selection
4991 1 RGB Frame Memory: single [0 to 11 / 2 / 1 /step]
4993* High Light Correction
4993 1 Sensitivity Selection

[0 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]
4993 2 Range Selection
4994* Text/Photo Detect Level Adj.
4994 1 High Compression PDF [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]
4996* White Paper Detect Level [0 to 6 / 3 / 1 /step]
[Dull 0 – 6 Sensitive]
4996 1
Adjusts the degree of white paper detection sensitivity.
54
System Service Mode
SP5-XXX (Mode)
5024* mm/inch Display Selection
Selects whether mm or inches are used in the display.
001 • After selecting the number, you must turn the main power switch off and on.
Europe/Asia model: [0: mm / 1: inch]
American model: [0: mm / 1: inch]
5045* Accounting Counter
Displays the number of the installed counter.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
5045 1 Counter Method 0: 1 counter (Total)
1: 2 counters (Total and Prints)
2: 2 counters GPC
5047* Paper Display
Backing Paper [0: OFF 1: ON]

001
Sets the “backing paper” button display ON/OFF on paper size selection.
5055 Display IP address
Displays or does not display the IP address on the

LCD.
001 Display IP address CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: No (Not display), 1: Yes (Display)
5062 Part Replacement Alert Display
Displays or does not display the PCU yield on the

LCD.
001 DCDU: Bk CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not display, 1: Display
55
RTB 11 (f/w ver 3.12)

SP5-083-001 was newly added.
5066 PM Parts Display
Displays or does not display the PM part button on

the LCD.
001 PM Parts Display CTL
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Not display, 1: Display
5112* Non-Std. Paper Sel. [0:OFF 1:ON]
5112 1 Sets “Non-standard size setting” in usual panel operations, available or not.
5113 Optional Counter Type
This program specifies the counter type.

0: None
1: Key card (RK 3, 4)
Default Optional
001 CTL 2: Key card (down)
Counter Type
3 to 10: (Japan only)
11: Exp. Key card (Add)
12: Exp. Key card (Deduct)
This program specifies the external counter type.

0: None
External Optional
002 CTL 1: Expansion Device type 1
Counter Type
2: Expansion Device type 2
3: Expansion Device type 3
[0: Not installed/ 1: Installed (scanning

5114 Optional Counter I/F CTL
accounting)]
001 MF Key Card Ext. Japan use
5118 Disable Copying
[0: Not disable / 1: Disable]

001
Sets copy disabled or enabled.
56
System Service Mode
Mode Clear Opt. Counter

5120* [0=Yes / 1=Standby only / 2=No]
Removal
Specifies the condition to reset the copy job settings when the key counter is removed.
• 0: Y = Yes: The settings are cleared when the counter is removed.
• 1: StdBy = Standby only: The settings are cleared when the counter is removed at
5120 1
the end of a job.
• 2: N = No: The settings are not cleared under either condition.
As for duplex copying, the job settings are always preserved regardless of these setting.
5121* Counter Up Timing [0 = Feed In / 1 = Exit]
Selects the count-up timing.

5121 1 • 0 = Feed: At each paper feed
• 1= Exit: At each paper exit
5127 APS Mode
[0: Not forbidden / 1: Forbidden]

001 Sets APS forbidden or not.
APS means “Auto paper size selection”.
Fax Printing Mode at Optional Counter Off

5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is used
when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.
[ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
001 CTL 0: Automatic printing
1: No automatic printing
CE Login
5169 If you change the printer bit switches, you must 'log in' to service mode with this SP before
you go into the printer SP mode.
[0 or 1 / 0 / - ]
001 CE Login CTL 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
57
5186* RK4: Setting [0 or 1 / 0]
5186 1 [1: Jam 0: None] in 10 sec after put the card out.
5188 Copy NV Version
Displays the NVRAM version in the controller

001 Copy NV Version CTL
board.
5195 Limitless SW [0 or 1 / 0]
Switches limitless paper feed for productivity or for paper run-out.

001 0: Productivity
1: Paper run-out
5212 Page Numbering [0 or 1 / 0]
Duplex Printout Right/Left Position
Horizontally positions the page numbers printed on

003
both sides during duplexing.
[–10 to 10/ 0 / 1 mm]
Duplex Printout High/Low Position
Vertically positions the page numbers printed on

004 both sides during duplexing.
[–10 to 10/ 0 / 1 mm]

0 is center, minus is down, + is up.
58
System Service Mode
Set Time
Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.
Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)
DOM: +540 (Tokyo)
5302 NA :-300 (New York)
EU :+ 60 (Paris)
CH :+480 (Peking)
TW :+480 (Taipei)
AS :+480 (Hong Kong)
CTL
002 Time Difference [-1440 to 1440 / Area / 1 min./step ]
#
RTB 11 (f/w ver 3.15)
SP5-305
5307 Summer Time
[ 0 or 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled
Setting -
1: Enabled
NA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0
001
Enables or disables the summer time mode.
• Make sure that both SP5-307-3 and -4 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP is not
activated even if this SP is set to "1".
59
Rule Set (Start) - -
Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the first digit, so
the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
003
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
7th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]
8th digit: The length of the advanced time. [0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]
For example: 3500010 (EU default)
The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March
• The digits are counted from the left.
• Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Rule Set (End) - -
Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.
1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]
3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]
004
4th digit: The day of the week. [0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]
5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]
The 7th and 8th digits must be set to "00".
• The digits are counted from the left.
• Make sure that SP5-307-1 is set to "1".
Access Control
5401
When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU
103 Default Document ACL CTL
60
System Service Mode
200 SDK1 Unique ID CTL
201 SDK1 Certification Method CTL

"SDK" is the "software development kit".
210 SDK2 Unique ID CTL This data can be converted from SAS
211 SDK2 Certification Method CTL (VAS) when installed or uninstalled.
(DFU)
220 SDK3 Unique ID CTL
221 SDK3 Certification Method CTL
Enables or disables the log-out

confirmation option.
Bit0: Log-out confirmation option
0: Enable (default), 1: Disable
240 Detail Option CTL Selects the automatic log-out time.

Bit1 and 2: Automatic log-out timer
reduction
00: 60 seconds (default), 01:10
seconds, 10: 20seconds, 11: 30
seconds
5404 User Code Count Clear
Clears the counts for the user codes assigned by the key operator to restrict the use of
001
the machine. Press [Execute] to clear.
5411 LDAP Certification
Simplified Authentication
Determines whether easy LDAP certification is done.

004 [0 to 1/1/1]
1: On
0: Off
61
Password Null Not Permit
This SP is referenced only when SP5411-4 is set to "1" (On).

005 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Password NULL not permitted.

1: Password NULL permitted.
Detail Option
006 Bit 0: Anonymous authorization [0: OFF 1: ON]
*Only bit 0 is used.
5413 Lockout Setting
Lockout On/Off
Switches on/off the lock on the local address book account.

001 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off
1: On
Lockout Threshold
002 Sets a limit on the frequency of lockouts for account lockouts.
[1 to 10/5/1]
Cancellation On/Off
Determines whether the system waits the prescribed time for input of a correct user ID and
password after an account lockout has occurred.
003
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off (no wait time, lockout not cancelled)
1: On (system waits, cancels lockout if correct user ID and password are entered.
Cancellation Time
Determines the length of time that the system waits for correct input of the user ID and
004 password after a lockout has occurred. This setting is used only if SP5413-3 is set to "1"
(on).
[1 to 999/60/1 min.]
62
System Service Mode
5414 Access Mitigation
Mitigation On/Off
Switches on/off masking of continuously used IDs and passwords that are identical.
001 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off
1: On
Mitigation Time
002 Sets the length of time for excluding continuous access for identical user IDs and
passwords.
[0 to 60/15/1 min.]
5415 Password Attack
Permissible Number
001 Sets the number of attempts to attack the system with random passwords to gain illegal
access to the system.
[0 to 100/30/1 attempt]
Detect Time
002 Sets the time limit to stop a password attack once such an attack has been detected.
[1 to 10/5/1 sec.]
5416 Access Information
Access User Max Num
001 Limits the number of users used by the access exclusion and password attack detection
functions.
[50 to 200/200/1 users]
Access Password Max Num
002 Limits the number of passwords used by the access exclusion and password attack
detection functions.
[50 to 200/200/1 passwords]
63
Monitor Interval
003 Sets the processing time interval for referencing user ID and password information.
[1 to 10/3/1 sec.]
5417 Access Attack
Access Permissible Number
001 Sets a limit on access attempts when an excessive number of attempts are detected for
MFP features.
[0 to 500/100/1]
Attack Detect Time
002 Sets the length of time for monitoring the frequency of access to MFP features.
[10 to 30/10/1 sec.]
Productivity Fall Wait
003 Sets the wait time to slow down the speed of certification when an excessive number of
access attempts have been detected.
[0 to 9/3/1 sec.]
Attack Max Num
004 Sets a limit on the number of requests received for certification in order to slow down the
certification speed when an excessive number of access attempts have been detected.
[50 to 200/200/1 attempt]
5420 User Authentication
These settings should be done with the System Administrator.

Note: These functions are enabled only after the user access feature has been enabled.
Copy
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the copy applications.
001 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
64
System Service Mode
Document Server
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the document server.
011 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
Fax
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the fax application.
021 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
Scanner
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the scan applications.
031 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
Printer
Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the printer applications.
041 [0 to 1/0/1]
0: On
1: Off
051 SDK1
[0 or 1/ 0 / 1] 0: ON. 1: OFF
061 SDK2 Determines whether certification is required before a user can use the
SDK application.
071 SDK3
Authentication Error Code

5481
These SP codes determine how the authentication failures are displayed.
65
System Log Disp
Determines whether an error code appears in the system log after a user authentication
failure occurs.
001
[0 to 1/0/1]
0: Off
1: On
Panel Disp
Determines whether an error code appears on the operation panel after a user
authentication failure occurs.
002
[0 to 1/1/1]
1: On
0: Off
5507 Supply Alarm CTL -
0: Toner is replaced (default)

080 Toner Call Timing
1: Toner near end or end
5508* CC Call CTL -
Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable

001*
Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.
Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable

002*
Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.
Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable

003*
Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.
SC/Alarm Setting CTL -

5515 With @Remote in use, these SP codes can be set to issue an SC call when an SC error
occurs. If this SP is switched off, the SC call is not issued when an SC error occurs.
66
System Service Mode
001 SC Call
002 Service Parts Near End Call
003 Service Parts End Call

[0 or 1 / 1 / -]
004 User Call
0: Off, 1: On
006 Communication Test Call
007 Machine Information Notice
008 Alarm Notice
010 Supply Automatic Ordering call
Supply Management Report [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off,1: On

011
call
012 Jam/Door Open Call [0 or 1 / 1 / -] 0: Off,1: On
5730 Extended Function Setting
Expiration Prior Alarm Set

010
DFU
Node Authentication Timeout

5741
DFU
5747 Browser Setting DFU
001 Use Cache File
002 Cache Size
003 Cache Clear
011 Default HTTP Request Method
021 User Agent
031 Use Java Script
032 Use Extended Java Script
67
041 Keep History
042 History Period
051 Use Proxy
052 Proxy Server Name
053 Proxy Port
054 Proxy User Name
055 Proxy Password
056 Hosts Not Using Proxy
061 Accept cookie
071 Show URL Bar
072 Show Horizontal Scroll
081 Homepage
181 User Permit: Homepage
182 User Permit: Bookmark
183 User Permit: Proxy
184 User Permit: History
185 User Permit: Screen Settings
201 JPEG Quality
202 Number of Common Bookmark

RTB 26
SP5-747-204 and -205
ECS Debug SW
5793
DFU
Browser Debug
5794
DFU
68
System Service Mode
[Memory Clear]
5801
Before executing any of these SP codes, print an SMC Report.
All Clear
001 Initializes items SP5801-002 to -014 below.
Turn the main power switch off and on after executing this SP.
Engine - -
002
Clears the engine settings.
SCS - -
003
Clears the system settings.
IMH Memory Clr
004 Initializes the image file system.
(IMH: Image Memory Handler)
MCS -
005
Clears MCS data. DFU
Copier application
006
Clears the copier application settings.
Fax Application - -
007
Clears the fax application settings.
Printer Application - -
008
Clears the printer application settings.
Scanner Application - -
009
Clears the scanner application settings.
Memory All Clear (Web

010 - -
Service)
NCS
011
Initializes the NCS (Net Control Service) settings.
69
R-FAX - -
012 Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage
file numbers.
Clear DCS Setting - -

014
Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.
Clear VCS Setting

015
Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.
CCS - -
017
Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.
018 SRM Memory Clr
LCS - -
019
Initializes the LCS (Log Count Service) settings.
Web Apli - -
020
Initializes Web application settings.
ECS
021
Initializes ECS (Engine Control Service).
AICS
023
Initializes the AICS settings.
BROWSER
024
DFU
Websys - -
Initialization applying to the following SPs:

025
SP5-885-020, SP5-885-050,SP5-885-051, SP5-885-100
SP5-885-101, SP5-885-200, SP5-885-201
Input Check
5803
"Input Check" in this chapter.
70
System Service Mode
Output Check
5804
"Output Check" in this chapter.
5810 SC Reset
001 Fusing SC Reset Resets SC of CE-Reset.
5811* Machine Serial
Display
002
"Machine No. Setting" in this section.
5812 Service Tel. No. Setting
Service CTL -
001 Sets the telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on the
Counter List, which can be printed with the user's "Counter" menu.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Facsimile CTL -
002 Sets the fax or telephone number for a service representative. This number is printed on
the Counter List.
This can be up to 20 characters (both numbers and alphabetic characters can be input).
Supply CTL -
003 Use this to input the telephone number of your supplier for consumables. Enter the
number and press"StringIn" key.
Press the "Clear modes" key to delete the telephone number.
Operation CTL -
004 Use this to input the telephone number of your sales agency. Enter the number and press
#.
Press the "Clear modes" key to delete the telephone number.
5816 Remote Service CTL -
021 RCG-C Registed [0: Unregistered 1: Registered]
71
Use Proxy
062 This SP setting determines if the proxy server is used when the machine communicates
with the service center.
Proxy Host
This SP sets the address of the proxy server used for communication between embedded
RCG-N and the gateway. Use this SP to set up or display the customer proxy server
address. The address is necessary to set up embedded RCG-N.
063
• The address display is limited to 127 characters. Characters beyond the 127th
character are ignored.
• This address is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Port Number
This SP sets the port number of the proxy server used for communication between
embedded RCG N and the gateway. This setting is necessary to set up embedded RCG-
064
N.
• This port number is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy User Name
This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication user name.
065
• The length of the name is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the 31st
character is ignored.
• This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
Proxy Password
This SP sets the HTTP proxy authentication password.
066
• The length of the password is limited to 31 characters. Any character beyond the
31st character is ignored.
• This name is customer information and is not printed in the SMC report.
72
System Service Mode
CommLog Print
250
Prints the communication log.
5824 NVRAM Upload
5824 1 "NVRAM Upload/Download" in this section.
5825 NVRAM Download
5825 1 "NVRAM Upload/Download" in this section.
5828 Network Setting CTL
IPv4 Address (Ethernet /

001 Default: 0B16212C H (011.022.033.044)
IEEE802.11)
Subnet Mask (Ethernet /

002 Default: 00000000 H (000.000.000.000)
IEEE802.11)
IPv4 Default Gateway

003 Default: 00000000 H (000.000.000.000)
(Ethernet / IEEE802.11)
Determines whether DHCP IP Address Setting is used or

DHCP (Ethernet / not.
006
IEEE802.11)
[0: Not used 1: Used]
021 Active IPv4 Address Default: 00000000 H (000.000.000.000)
022 Active IPv4 Subnet Mask Default: 00000000 H (000.000.000.000)
023 Active IPv4 Gateway Address Default: 00000000 H (000.000.000.000)
050 1284 Compatibility (Centro) [0:Not permitted 1:Permitted]
052 ECP (Centro) [0:Not permitted 1:Permitted]
Enables/disables Job Spooling.

065 Job Spooling [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Determines whether spooled job in the HDD is cleared

066 Job Spooling clear: start time or printed on machine start-up.
[0: Clear 1: Print]
73
Validates or invalidates the job spooling function for

each protocol.
0: Validates
1: Invalidates
bit0: LPR
bit1: FTP
069 Job Spooling (Protocol)
bit2: IPP
bit3: SMB
bit4: BMLinkS
bit5: DIPRINT
bit6: (Reserved)
bit7: (Reserved)
74
System Service Mode
@Remote Protocol Cnt
Represents whether each network function has been used or not.

[0: Not used 1: Used]
Bit Function Bit Function
0 IPsec 16 SMB print
1 IPv6 17 WSD-Printer
2 IEEE 802.1X 18 WSD-Scanner
3 Wireless LAN 19 Scan to SMB
4 Security Level Setting 20 Scan to NCP
5 AppleTalk 21 Reserve
087
6 DHCP 22 Bluetooth
7 DHCPv6 23 IEEE 1284
8 telnet 24 USB print
9 SSL 25 Dynamic DNS
10 HTTPS 26 Netware print
11 BMLinks print 27 LLTD
12 diprint printing 28 IPP print
13 LPR print 29 IPP print (SSL)
14 ftp print 30 ssh
15 rsh print 31 sftp
090 TELNET(0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the TELENET.
Enables or disables the Web operation.

091 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) [ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]
0: Disable, 1: Enable
75
145 Active IPv6 Link Local Address
Active IPv6 Stateless Address

147
1

149
2 These SPs are the IPv6 status addresses (1 to 5)
referenced on the Ethernet or wireless LAN (802.11b)
151 in the format:
3
"Status Address" + "Prefix Length"
153 The IPv6 address consists of a total of 128 bits
4
configured in 8 blocks of 16 bits each.
155
5
156 IPv6 Manual Address
158 IPv6 Gateway Address
Enables or disables the function.

161 IPv6 Stateless Auto Setting
[0: Disable 1: Enable]
Web Item Invisible
Determines whether each item can be set in Websys.

[0x0000 to 0xffff/0xffff]
Bit 1: NetRICOH
Bit2: Vendor for consumables
Bit2-15: Reserved
236
Web Shopping Link Invisible
Determines whether the NetRICOH link is displayed on the Websys top page and link
page.
[0 to 1/1/1]
1: Display
0: No display
237 Web Shopping Link Visible [0: Invisible 1: Visible]
238 Web Supplies Link Visible [0: Invisible 1: Visible]
239 Web Link 1 Name Default: Null
76
System Service Mode
240 Web Link 1 URL Default: URL1
241 Web Link 1 Visible [0: Invisible 1: Visible]
242 Web Link 2 Name Default: URL2
243 Web Link 2 URL Default: URL2
244 Web Link 2 Visible [0: Invisible 1: Visible]
249 DHCPv6 DUID -
HDD
5832 Enter the SP number for the partition to initialize, then press “Execute”. When the
execution ends, cycle the machine off and on.
001 HDD Formatting (All)
002 HDD Formatting (IMH)
003 HDD Formatting (Thumbnail)
004 HDD Formatting (Job Log)
005 HDD Formatting (Printer Fonts)
006 HDD Formatting (User Info)
007 Mail Rx Data
008 Mail Tx Data
009 HDD Formatting (Data for a Design)
010 HDD Formatting (Log)
011 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)
5836 Capture Setting
Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) [0: OFF / 1: ON]

001
Capture setting shows up in “user tool” menu when this SP’s value is 1.
Panel Setting [0: ON / 1: OFF]

002
Determines whether the capture function is available or not.
77
072 Reduction for Copy B&W Text [0 to 3, 6 / 0 / 1 /step]

Resolution conversion rate for stored document
073 Reduction for Copy B&W Other
sent to the document server. Each value
represents:
0: x1
1: x1/2
075 Reduction for Printer B&W
2: x1/3
3: x1/4
6: x2/3
082 Format for Copy B&W Text [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]

These SPs are valid only when MLB is
083 Format for Copy B&W Other
equipped. Each of the following values
represents:
0: JFIF/JPEG
085 Format for Printer B&W 1: TIFF/MMR
2: TIFF/MH
3: TIFF/MR
091 Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
[000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255]
Primary srv IP address
Default: 000.000.000.000
101
Sets IP address to make a relation with PC designed as Capture server (CS). Normally,
the value is determined automatically on CS I/O device registration.
Primary srv scheme [6 letter(s) character strings]

102
Normally, the value is determined automatically on CS I/O device registration.
Primary srv port number [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 /step]

103
Primary srv URL path [0 to 16 letter(s)]

104
78
System Service Mode
[000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255]
Secondary srv IP address
Default: 000.000.000.000
111
Normally, the value is determined automatically on CS I/O device registration. Only IP
address designation is valid.
Secondary srv scheme [Max 6 letter(s)]

112
Secondary srv port number [1 to 65535 / 80 / 1 /step]

113
Secondary srv URL path [0 to 16 letter(s)]

114
Default Reso Rate Switch [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

120
Reso: Copy (Mono) [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
The value affects the output resolution. See the list below.
*When the resolution cannot be output for the machine specification limit, output is done
by the nearest rate within the limitation.
Value Resolution
0 600dpi
122
1 400dpi
2 300dpi
3 200dpi
4 150dpi
5 100dpi
6 75dpi
79
Reso: Print (Mono) [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 /step]
The value affects the resolution applying to capturing a monochrome original read by
Print application. See the list below.
Value Resolution
124 0 600dpi
1 400dpi
2 300dpi
3 200dpi
4 150dpi
5 100dpi
6 75dpi
Reso: Fax (Mono) [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 /step]
Fax application. See the list below.
Value Resolution
126 0 600dpi
1 400dpi
2 300dpi
3 200dpi
4 150dpi
5 100dpi
6 75dpi
80
System Service Mode
Reso: Scanner (Color) [0 to 255 / 4 / 1 /step]
The value affects the resolution applying to capturing a colored original read by Scanner
application. See the list below.
Value Resolution
127 0 600dpi
1 400dpi
2 300dpi
3 200dpi
4 150dpi
5 100dpi
6 75dpi
Reso: Scanner (Mono) [0 to 255 / 3 / 1 /step]
Scanner application. See the list below.
Value Resolution
128 0 600dpi
1 400dpi
2 300dpi
3 200dpi
4 150dpi
5 100dpi
6 75dpi
81
141 All Addr Info Switch [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Stand-by Doc Max Number [10 to 10000 / 2000 / 1 /step]

142
Sets how many stand-by documents sent to CS the device can hold.
5840 IEEE 802.11
[1 to 11 or 13 / 11 or 13 / 1 /step]
Channel MAX CTL Europe: 1 to 13, default: 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11, default: 11
Sets the maximum number of channels available for data transmission via Wireless LAN.
006 The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings are
set for the maximum end of the range for each area. Adjust the upper 4 bits to set the
maximum number of channels. DFU
• Do not change the setting.
[ 1 to 11 or 13 / 1 / 1 /step]
Channel MIN CTL Europe: 1 to 13
NA/ Asia: 1 to 11
Sets the minimum number of channels available for data transmission via the wireless
007 LAN. The number of channels available varies according to location. The default settings
are set for the minimum end of the range for each area. Adjust the lower 4 bits to set the
minimum number of channels. DFU
• Do not change the setting.
Transmission Speed [00 to FF h / FF (Auto)]
Each value suggests as follows:

FF= Auto / 11= 54M Fix / 10= 48M Fix / 0F= 36M Fix / 0E= 24M Fix
008
0D= 18M Fix / 0C= 12M Fix / 0B= 9M Fix / 0A= 6M Fix / 07= 11M Fix
06= 5.5M Fix / 05= 2M Fix / 08= 1M Fix /
13 to FE= Reserved / 12= 72M Fix / 09= 22M Fix / 01 to 04= Not used
82
System Service Mode
[00 to 11 / 00 / 1 binary]
00: Key #1
WEP Key Select CTL 01: Key #2 (Reserved)
011
10: Key #3 (Reserved)
11: Key #4 (Reserved)
Selects the WEP key.
Fragment Thresh CTL [256 to 2346 / 2346 / 1]
042 Adjusts the fragment threshold for the IEEE802.11 card.
This SP is displayed only when the IEEE802.11 card is installed.
11g CTS to Self CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: Off, 1: On
043 Determines whether the CTS self function is turned on or off.
11g Slot Time CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1] 0: 20 m, 1: 9 m

044
Selects the slot time for IEEE802.11.
[0 to 3 / 3 / 1]
WPA Debug Lyl CTL
1: Info, 2: Warning, 3: Error
045
Selects the debug log for WPA authentication application.
5842 GWWS Analysis DFU
83
Setting 1 CTL
Bit Groups
0 System & other groups (LSB)
1 Capture related
This is a debugging tool. It sets the 2 Certification related

001 debugging output mode of each
Net File process. 3 Address book related
Default: Bit SW 1000 0000 4 Machine management related
5 Output related (printing, delivery)
6 Repository related
7 Debug log output
Setting 2 CTL
Bit Groups
0-6 Not used

002
Default: Bit SW 0000 0000
Log time stamp setting
7 0: Date/Hour/Minute/Second
1: Minute/Second/Msecond
5844 USB
Transfer Rate CTL
Sets the speed for USB data transmission.

001
[Full Speed]
[Auto Change]
Vendor ID CTL
Sets the vendor ID:

002
Initial Setting: 0x05A Ricoh Company
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU
84
System Service Mode
Product ID CTL
003 Sets the product ID.
[0x0000 to 0xFFFF/1] DFU
Device Release Number CTL
Sets the device release number of the BCD (binary coded decimal) display.
004 [0000 to 9999/1] DFU
Enter as a decimal number. NCS converts the number to hexadecimal number

recognized as the BCD.
Fixed USB Port [0 to 3/ 0 / 1 /step ]
Sets the control function saving driver re-install ON/OFF.

005 0: OFF
1: ON (Level 1)= ON for the same model.

2: ON (Level 2)= Depending on “SP5844 -006,-007”
PnP Model Name [20 letter(s)]

006
Sets the model name for USB PnP when “SP5844-005” is “2”.
PnP Serial Number [12 digit]

007
Sets the serial number for USB PnP when “SP5844-005” is “2”.
Notify UnSupport [0: Disabled / 1: Enabled]

100
Sets banner message popup Enabled/Disabled on unsupported USB device connection.
Delivery Server Setting CTL -

5845
Provides items for delivery server settings.
FTP Port No. [ 0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]

001
Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.
Delivery Error Display Time [0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]
006 Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayed when a
test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application and an external
device.
85
Range: 000.000.000.000 to
Server IP (Secondary)
255.255.255.255
008 Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as the
secondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IP
address without reference to the DNS setting.
Delivery Server Model [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]
Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.
009
0: Unknown, 1: SG1 Provided, 2: SG1 Package,
3: SG2 Provided, 4: SG2 Package
Delivery Svr. Capability [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits
Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible
Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible
Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function

010 exists Changes the capability of the
server that is registered as an
Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists I/O device.
Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists
Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists
Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6

is set to "0")
Delivery Svr. Capability (Ext) [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
Changes the capability of the server that is registered as an I/O device.

011
Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)
Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link
Bit5 to 0: Not used
Server Scheme (Primary) -

013
Specifies the scheme of the primary delivery server.
86
System Service Mode
Server Port Number (Primary) -

014
Specifies the port number of the primary delivery server.
Server URL Path (Primary) -

015
Specifies the URL path of the primary delivery server.
Server Scheme (Sec) -

016
Specifies the scheme of the secondary delivery server.
Port Number (Sec) -

017
Specifies the port number of the secondary delivery server.
URL Path (Sec) -

018
Specifies the URL path of the secondary delivery server.
[ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
Rapid Sending Control
022 0: Disable, 1: Enable
Enables or disables the prevention function for the continuous data sending.
UCS Settings CTL

5846
Provides items for delivery server settings.
Machine ID (for Delivery

Displays ID
Server)
001 Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value is only
displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or IEEE 1394
EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.
Machine ID Clear (for Delivery

Clears ID
Server)
002 Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory. Execute
this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the
ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling the machine off and on.
87
Maximum Entries [150 to 999 / 150 / 1 /step]
003 Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.
If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared, and the
data (excluding user code information) is displayed.
Delivery Server retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

006 Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
server address book.
Delivery Server retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

007 Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the delivery
server address book.
Delivery Server Maximum

[200 to 999 / 200 / 1/step]
Entries
008
Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user information
managed by UCS.
LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]

010
Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.
WSD Maximum Entries [5 to 255 / 250 / 1 /step]

020
Sets the maximum entries for the address book of the WSD (SD-scanner)
[0 or 1 / 0 / -]
021 Folder Auth change 0: Login user name
1: address book
Initial Value of Upper Limit

022 -
Count
88
System Service Mode
Addr Book Migration (USB -> HDD)
This SP moves the address book data from the SD card or flash ROM on the controller
board to the HDD. You must cycle the machine off and on after executing this SP.
1. Turn the machine off.
2. Install the HDD.
3. Turn the machine on.
4. Do SP5846 040.
5. Turn the machine off/on.
040
• • Executing this SP overwrites any address book data already on the HDD with the
• data from the flash ROM on the controller board.
• • We recommend that you back up all directory information to an SD card with
• SP5846-051 before you execute this SP.
• • After the address book data is copied to HDD, all the address book data is
• deleted from the flash ROM. If the operation fails, the data is not erased from the
• flash ROM.
Fill Adder Book A C L Info
This SP must be executed immediately after installation of an HDD unit in a basic machine
that previously had no HDD. The first time the machine is powered on with the new HDD
041 installed, the system automatically takes the address book from the NVRAM and writes it
onto the new HDD. However, the new address book on the HDD can be accessed only
by the system administrator at this stage. Executing this SP by the service technician
immediately after power on grants full address book access to all users.
Addr Book Media

043
Displays the slot number where an address book data is in.
Initialize All Setting & Addr Clears the local address book information, including
046
Book the user code.
Clears the local address book information, including

047 Initialize Local Addr Book
the user code.
Initialize All Delivery Addr Clears the distribution address book information,
048
Book except the user code.
89
Clears the LDAP address book information, except the

049 Initialize All LDAP Addr Book
user code.
Clears all directory information managed by UCS,

including all user codes.
050 Initialize All Addr Book
Turn the main power switch off and on after executing
this SP.
051 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.
052 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
Deletes the address book data from the SD card in the

service slot.
Deletes only the files that were uploaded from this
machine.
053 Clear Backup Info
This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.
Note: After you do this SP, go out of the SP mode, and
then turn the power off. Do not remove the SD card until
the Power LED stops flashing.
This SP uses bit switches to set up the fuzzy search

options for the UCS local address book.
060 Search Option Bit0: Checks both upper/lower case characters
Bit1: Japan only
Bit2 to 7: Not used
Use this SP to set the conditions for password entry to

access the local address book. Specifically, this SP
062 Complexity Option 1(1) limits the password entry to upper case and sets the
length of the password.
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

063 Complexity Option 2(1) limits the password entry to lower case and defines the
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
90
System Service Mode

064 Complexity Option 3(1) limits the password entry to numbers and defines the
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]

065 Complexity Option 4(1) limits the password entry to symbols and defines the
[0 to 32 / 0 / 1 /step]
Specifies the FTP port for getting a distribution server

091 FTP Auth Port Setting address book that is used in the identification mode.
[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]
Shows the status of the encryption function for the

094 Encryption Stat
address book data.
Note (1):
SP5846-062 to SP5846-065 do not normally require adjustment.
These SP modes are enabled only after the system administrator has set up a group password policy to
control access to the address book.
Rep Resolution Reduction

5847 This SP applies to GW Repository service and NetFile page reference function. Some
settings need MLB-equipment to effect.
002 Rate for Copy B&W Text Each value

represents:
003 Rate for Copy B&W Other [0 to 6 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: x1, 1: 1/2,
005 Rate for Printer B&W 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4,
4: 1/6, 5: 1/8,
007 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi [0 to 6 / 1 / 1 /step]
6: 2/3
021 Network Quality Default for JPEG [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]
91
Web Service CTL -
5848 SP5848-1 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of 0001
has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.
ac: Access Control
Access Ctrl: Repository (only

002
Lower 4 Bits)
Access Ctrl: U Directory (only

004
Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Log Fax (Lower 4

007
bits)
Switches access control on and off.
Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4
009 0000: No access control
bits)
0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.
Access Ctrl: Device
011
management (Lower 4 bits)
Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower

021
4bits)
Access Ctrl: U Administration

022
(Lower 4bits)
Repository: Download Image

099 DFU
Set
Repository: Download Image

100 [1 to 1024/1 K]
Max
210 Log Type: Job1
211 Log Type: Job2
212 Log Type: Access Displays the log server settings.
213 Primary Server These can be adjusted with the Web Image Monitor.
214 Secondary Server
215 Start Time
92
System Service Mode
Specifies the transmit interval.

[1 to 1000 / 1 / 1 hour/step]
216 Interval Time
This SP is activated only when SP5848-217 is set to
"2 (Transmit periodically)".
Selects the transmit timing.

[0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
217 Timing
0: No Transmit, 1: Transmit one by one
2: Transmit periodically
Installation Date CTL

5849
Displays or prints the installation date of the machine.
The "Counter Clear Day" has been changed to "Installation Date"

001 Display
or "Inst. Date".
Determines whether the installation date is printed on the printout

for the total counter.
002 Switch to Print
[0 or 1/ 1 / 1/step]
0: Off (No Print), 1: On (Print)
Displays the total counter when the installation date is registered

003 Total Counter
to the machine.
Stamp Data Download
Push [Execute] to download the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard
disk. Then these stamps can be used by the system. If this is not done, the user will not
5853
have access to the fixed stamps ("Confidential", "Secret", etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the HDD.
Always switch the machine off and on after executing this SP.
Remote ROM Update

5856 Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when updating the
remote ROM.
93
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 Local Port CTL 0: Disallow
1: Allow
5857 Save Debug Log CTL -
ON/OFF 0: OFF, 1: ON
001 Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured until this
feature is switched on.
Target (2: HDD 3: SD)
Selects the destination where the debugging information generated by the event selected
by SP5858 will be stored if an error is generated
002
[2 to 3 /1]
2: HDD
3: SD Card
Save to HDD
005
Specifies the decimal key number of the log to be written to the hard disk.
Save to SD Card
006
Specifies the debug log number for saving to an SD card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4MB)
Takes the most recent 4 MB of the log written to the hard disk and copies them to the SD
009 Card.
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card.
Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4MB Any Key)
Takes the log of the specified key from the log on the hard disk and copies it to the SD
Card.
010
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD Card.
Up to 4 MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
each SD Card. This SP does not execute if there is no log on the HDD with no key
specified.
94
System Service Mode
Erase HDD Debug Data

011
Erases all debug logs on the HDD
Erase SD Card Debug Data
012 Erases SD debug logs in the SD card.
Turn off and on after executing this SP.
Free Space on SD Card

013
Displays the remaining space in the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)
Saves the debug log (latest 4 MB) in memory to the SD card.

014
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to the SD card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
the SD card.
Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)
Saves the specified debug log (with SP5-857-006) in memory to the SD card.
015
A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SD card.
Up to 4MB can be copied to the SD card. 4 MB segments can be copied one by one to
the SD card.
Make HDD Debug

016
This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD.
Make SD Debug
017
Executes the making of a file (4MB) for saving debug logs.
Debug Save When CTL -
These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to the destination
5858 selected by SP5857-2.
SP5858-3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to the chapter "Trouble Shooting"
for a list of SC error codes.
95
Turns the save function on/off for SC codes generated by

copier engine errors.
001 Engine SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
Turns the save function on/off for SC codes generated by

GW controller errors.
002 Controller SC Error
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
003 Any SC Error [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]
Turns the save function on/off for jam errors.

004 Jam [0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]
0: OFF, 1: ON
5859 Debug Save Key No. CTL -
001 Key 1
002 Key 2
003 Key 3
004 Key 4
005 Key 5 These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log files for
functions that use common memory on the controller board.
006 Key 6 [ –9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]
007 Key 7
008 Key 8
009 Key 9
010 Key 10
5860 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 CTL -
96
System Service Mode
Partial Mail Receive Timeout [1 to 168 / 72 / 1 hour/step]
020 Sets the amount of time to wait before saving mail that breaks up during reception. The
received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not received during this
prescribed time.
MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [0 to 1 / 1 / – ]
021 Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.
0: No, 1: Yes
SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [0 to 1 / 0 / – ]
022 Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validated
account after the SMTP server is validated.
0: No. "From" item not switched. 1: Yes. "From" item switched.
SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [0 or 1 / 0 / – ]
Selects the authentication method for SMPT.

Bit switch:
• Bit 0: LOGIN
• Bit 1: PLAIN
025
• Bit 2: CRAM MD5
• Bit 3: DIGEST MD5
• Bit 4 to 7: Not used
• This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.
S/MINE: MINE Header Setting [0 to 2 / 0 /1 /step]
Compliance setting for S/MINE output mail header.

026 0: Microsoft Outlook Express
1: Internet Draft
2: RFC
5866 E-mail Report
Add Date Field CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Not add, 1: Add

005
Adds or does not add the date field to the header of the alert mail.
97
5869 RAM Disk Setting
Mail Function GWINIT 0: ON, 1: OFF

001
Turns on or off the e-mail function.
5873 SD Card Appli Move
This SP copies the application programs from the original

001 Move Exec
SD card in SD card slot 3 to an SD card in SD card slot 2.
This SP copies back the application programs from an SD

card in the SD Card Slot 3 to the original SD card in the SD
002 Undo Exec
card slot 2. Use this menu when you have mistakenly
copied some programs by using "Move Exec" (SP5873-1).
5875 SC Auto Reboot
Selects the reboot method for SC.

002 Reboot Type CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]
0: Manual reboot, 1: Automatic reboot
5876 Security Clear
001 All clear
011 Clear NCS Security Setting Press “Execute” to activate.
015 Clear UCS Security Setting
5878 Option Setup
001 Data Overwrite Security Enables the Data Overwrite Security unit. Press
"EXECUTE" on the operation panel. Then turn the
002 HDD Encryption machine off and on.
5881 Fixed Phrase Block Erasing
001 - Deletes the fixed form sentence.
5885 Set WIM Function
98
System Service Mode
[0: Disabled 1: Enabled]

DocSvr Acc Ctrl
*Reboot machine to confirm the setting.
Bit Function Default
0 All access prohibition
1 All access prohibition for user mode
020 2 Print function prohibition
3 Fax transmitting prohibition

0
4 Scanner transmitting prohibition
5 DL function prohibition
6 Delete function prohibition
7 Access prohibition for guest user
DocSvr Format
050 [0: Thumbnail / 1: Icon / 2: Detail]
Sets the way in which files in the document box are displayed.
DocSvr Trans [5 to 20 / 10 / 1/step]

051
Sets how many files in the document box are displayed per page.
200 Detect Mem Leak
201 DocSvr Timeout
5887 SD GetCounter SSP
This SP saves the counter list of the machine to an SD card in the slot 3.
001
The folder of "SD_COUNTER" must be made in an SD card for this SP.
Personal Information Protect
Selects the protection level for logs.

5888* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1}
0: No authentication, No protection for logs
1: No authentication, Protected logs (an administrator can see the logs)
99
[SDK Apli Cnt Name] *CTL -

5893
Displays the counter name of each SDK application.
001 SDK-1
002 SDK-2
003 SDK-3
004 SDK-4
005 SDK-5
006 SDK-6
5894 External Counter Setting
001 Switch Charge Mode [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step] (DFU)
5907* Plug & Play Maker / Model Name
Selects the brand name and production name for the Plug and Play function. These
names are stored in the NVRAM. When the NVRAM data is corrupted, select these
5907 1 names once again. Use the right-arrow or left-arrow key to scroll through the list of brand
names. To select a brand name, press the OK key. An asterisk (*) indicates which
manufacture is currently selected.
5913 Switch Permission Time
Print Application Timer
Sets the length of time to elapse before allowing another application to take control of
002 the display when the application currently controlling the display is not operating
because a key has not been pressed.
[3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second/step]
5967 Copy Server: Set Function
001 (0: ON 2: OFF) Sets the document server function ON/OFF.
5973 User Stamp Registration
001 Frame deletion Setting [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
100
System Service Mode
Device Setting
5985 The NIC and USB support features are built into the GW controller. Use this SP to enable
and disable these features. In order to use the NIC and USB functions built into the
controller board, these SP codes must be set to "1".
[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
0: OFF, 1: ON, 2: ON: Limited
When the "Function limitation" is set, "On board NIC" is limited
only for the @Remote or LDAP/NT authentication.
001 On Board NIC
• Other network applications than @Remote or LDAP/NT

authentication are not available when this SP is set to "2".
Even if you can change the initial settings of those network
applications, settings may not actually work.
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1/step]
002 On Board USB
0: OFF, 1: ON
5987 Mech. Counter [0: OFF / 1: ON]
Gives the counter list text to the SD card inserted in the service slot.
001
In the SD card, the folder named “SD_COUNTER” must be placed in the root directory.
SP Print Mode SMC Print
In the SP mode, press Copy Window to move to the copy screen, select the paper size,
5990 then press Start. Select A4/LT (Sideways) or larger to ensure that all the information
prints. Press SP Window to return to the SP mode, select the desired print, and press
"EXECUTE".
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
101
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
SP Text Mode
5992
This SP gives the SMC print text data to SD card inserted.
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default (Prints only SPs set to values other than defaults.)
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
5994 Mirroring
102
System Service Mode
001 Engine Execution type SP (DFU)
5995 Factory Mode
001 - [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 STEP/step] (DFU)
SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
ADF Adjustment ( "DF Image Adjustment" in the "Adjusting Copy Image Area")
6006*
NOTE: Available menus depend on the machine model and its configuration.
Side-to-Side Regist Adjustment

001 [–2.0 to +2.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
Face
002 Side-to-Side [–2.0 to +2.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
003 Leading Edge Duplex Front [–5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
004 Leading Edge Duplex Rear [–5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
007 Rear Edge Erase [–5.0 to +5.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]
6007 ADF INPUT Check
Original Detection [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 STEP/step]

009 Displays ADF original sensor information. When the sensor detects an original, this SP’s
value becomes “1”.
Registration Sensor [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 STEP/step]

013 Displays ADF registration sensor information. When the sensor detects an original, this
SP’s value becomes “1”.
015 Feed Cover Sensor [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 STEP/step]
Displays ADF sensor information. When the cover opens, this SP’s value becomes “1”.
6008 ADF OUTPUT Check
Feed Motor Forward [ON/OFF]

003
Makes the paper transfer motor rotate to check ADF condition against operational load.
103
Feed Motor Reverse [ON/OFF]

004 Makes the paper transfer motor reverse-rotate to check ADF condition against
operational load.
009 Feed Solenoid [ON/OFF]
Makes the paper feed solenoid intermittent-drive to check ADF condition against
operational load.
011 Inverter Solenoid [ON/OFF]
Makes the inverter solenoid intermittent-drive to check ADF condition against

operational load.
6009 ADF Free Run
Simplex Mode [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 STEP/step]
001 Performs an ARDF free run at simplex scanning mode.
Press "ON" to start; press "OFF" to stop.
Duplex Mode [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 STEP/step]
002 Performs an ARDF free run in duplex scanning mode.
Press "ON" to start; press "OFF" to stop.
6017 ADF Adjustment Magnification
Magnification [-5 to 5 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]

001
Adjusts vertical magnification for ADF.
6021 ARDF Motor
Gain Selection [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]
001 The values represent:
[0: Universal / 1: for GX060050 / 2: for GX060040]
6149 Max. Pre-Stack Sheet
001 [0 to 3 / 3 / 1 Sheet(s)/step]
104
System Service Mode
6910 ADF Adjustment Shading Time [0 to 90 / 60 / 1 Sec/step]
Adjusts the interval used for the shading processing in the ARDF mode. Light and heat in
001 the room may affect the scanner response. Reduce this setting if copy quality indicates
that the white level is drifting during ARDF copy jobs.
SP7-XXX (Data Log)
7401* Total SC [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
SC Counter
001
Displays how many times SC codes are generated.
Total SC Counter
002 Displays how many times SC codes are generated including the number having been
reset.
7403* SC History
001 Latest
002 Latest 1
003 Latest 2
004 Latest 3
005 Latest 4
Displays the most recent 10 service calls.
006 Latest 5
007 Latest 6
008 Latest 7
009 Latest 8
010 Latest 9
7502* Total Paper Jam [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Jam Counter Displays the total number of copy paper

001 Jam Counter
jams.
105
Total Jam Counter including the number having been

002 Total Jam Counter
reset.
7503* Total Original Jam [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
001 Original Jam Counter Displays the total number of original jams.
Total Original Counter including the number having been

002 Total Original Counter
reset.
Paper Jam Location [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

7504*
Displays the total number of the paper jams classified by timing and location.
At power on
001 SP7504
Paper jam occurs at power on. RTB 42: Description modified
010 2nd Paper Feed SN: Late
011 3rd Paper Feed SN: Late
012 4th Paper Feed SN: Late
021 LCT Paper Feed SN: Late
022 1st Vertical Transport SN: Late
050 2nd Vertical Transport SN: Late
060 4th Vertical Transport SN: Late
070 Relay SN: Late
121 Registration SN: Late
122 Fusing Exit SN: Late
123 Exit Unit Entrance SN: Late
125 Paper Exit SN: Late
106
System Service Mode
Paper Jam Location (Original)
Displays the total number of original jams by location. These jams occur when the
original does not activate the sensors.
7505 Note
• Lag. Jam occurs when the paper remains at the sensor for longer than the
prescribed time.
• Late: Jam occurs because paper fails to arrive at the prescribed time.
1 Duplex Entrance SN: Late
4 Duplex Transport SN1: Late
54 Duplex Transport: SN2: Late
7506 Jam Count by Paper Size
006 A5 LEF
044 HLT LEF
133 A4 SEF
134 A5 SEF
Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.
142 B5 SEF CTL
[ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
164 LG SEF
166 LT SEF
172 HLT SEF
255 Others
7507* Plotter Jam History
107
001 Latest
002 Latest 1 Displays the copy jam history (the most recent 10 jams)
003 Latest 2 Sample Display:

CODE:023
004 Latest 3
SIZE:05h
005 Latest 4 TOTAL:0000334
006 Latest 5 DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000

CODE is the SP7504-*** number (see above.)
007 Latest 6
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
008 Latest 7 TOTAL is the total jam error count (SP7502)
009 Latest 8 DATE is the date the jams occurred.
010 Latest 9
Size Code Size Code Size Code
A4 (S) 05 A3 (L) 84 DLT (L) A0
A5 (S) 06 A4 (L) 85 LG (L) A4
B5 (S) 0E A5 (L) 86 LT (L) A6
LT (S) 26 B4 (L) 8D HLT (L) AC
HLT (S) 2C B5 (L) 8E Others FF
7508* Original Jam History
108
System Service Mode
001 Latest
002 Latest 1 Displays the original jam history (the most recent 10 jams).
003 Latest 2 Sample Display:

CODE:007
004 Latest 3
SIZE:05h
005 Latest 4 TOTAL:0000334
006 Latest 5 DATE: Mon Mar 15 11:44:50 2000

CODE is the SP7505*** number (see above.)
007 Latest 6
SIZE is the ASAP paper size code in hex.
008 Latest 7 TOTAL is the total error count (SP7503)
009 Latest 8 DATE is the date the jams occurred.
010 Latest 9
Parts Replacement Operation ON/OFF

7624 [0 or 1 / 1 ]
PCDU:BK
[0: No / 1: Yes]
001 Determines whether the use of PM applies to the machine or not. After selecting “Yes”
(1), confirm the “SP5067” (Parts replacement operation type) setting.
7801 ROM version. / Firmware Version
255 Displays the parts number and versions of all ROMs in the machine.
7803* PM Counter Display
001 Paper Displays the PM counter.
002 Sheets 45k part Displays the PM sheet Counter (45k).
003 Sheets 90k part Displays the PM sheet Counter (90k).
Distance (mm)
004 Displays the PM distance Counter (45k).
45k
Distance (mm)
005 Displays the PM distance Counter (90k).
90k
109
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
006 Distance 45k part
Displays the PM distance Counter (45k) usage rate.
[0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]
007 Distance 90k part
Displays the PM distance Counter (90k) usage rate.
7804 PM Count Reset
Paper
001 Resets the PM counter (SP7-803-001). When the program ends normally, the message
"Completed" is displayed.
002 45k part PM counter (45k) clear
003 90k part PM counter (90k) clear
7807 SC/Jam Counter Reset
Resets the SC, paper, original, and total jam counters. When the program ends
001 normally, the message "Completed" is displayed.
SP7-807-1 does not clear the latest 10 JAM and SC logs.
MF Error Counter
7826
Displays the number of counts requested of the card/key counter.
A request for the count total failed at power on. This error
001 Error Counter
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
The request for a staple count failed at power on. This error
002 Error Staple
will occur if the device is installed but disconnected.
MF Error Counter Clear

7827
Press Execute to reset to 0 the values of SP7826.
7832* Self-Diagnose Result Display
Displays the SC codes and the number of their occurrences. Each number is in the range
001
of 0 to 9999.
110
System Service Mode
Total Memory size

7836
Displays the contents of the memory on the controller board.
7852* DF Glass Dust Check
001 Dust Detection Counter Displays each counter in the range of 0 to

002 Dust Detection Clear Counter 65535.
Assert Info
7901 Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored in this
SP is used for problem analysis.
001 File Name - -
002 Number of Lines - -
003 Location - -
7906 Last PM Count
002 Sheets 45k part

Displays each of the PM sheet Counter: the last count
003 Sheets 90k part
004 Distance (mm) 45k part Displays each of the PM distance Counter: the last
005 Distance (mm) 90k part count
006 Distance 45k Displays each of the PM distance Counter usage rate:
007 Distance 90k the last count
7907 Before 2 PM Count
002 Sheets 45k part Displays each of the PM sheet Counter (90k): the
003 Sheets 90k part second last count
004 Distance (mm) 45k part Displays each of the PM distance Counter: the second
005 Distance (mm) 90k part last count
111
007 Distance 90k the second last count
7908 Before 3 PM Count
002 Sheets 45k part Displays each of the PM sheet Counter (90k): the third
003 Sheets 90k part last count
004 Distance (mm) 45k part Displays each of the PM distance Counter: the third last
005 Distance (mm) 90k part count
007 Distance 90k the third last count
SP8-XXX (Data Log 2)

Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the mode of
operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table, make sure that
you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C,

T: Total: (Grand Total).
F, P, etc.)..
C: Copy application.
F: Fax application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application
P: Print application. when the job was not stored on the document server.
S: Scan application.
Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L:

counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they
count jobs/pages stored on the document server; this
can be in document server mode (from the document
Local storage (document
L: server window), or from another mode, such as from a
server)
printer driver or by pressing the Store File button in the
Copy mode window. Sometimes, they include occasions
when the user uses a file that is already on the document
server. Each counter will be discussed case by case.
112
System Service Mode
Refers to network applications such as Web Image

Other applications
Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK (Software
O: (external network
Development Kit) will also be counted with this group in
applications, for example)
the future.
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them on the
small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of abbreviations below and
refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means
/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to

DesApl
store the job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
113
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count
up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number
GPC
that is in excess of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up
11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border
ImgEdt
removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS (@Remote), which allows a service center to monitor machines

NRS
remotely. "@Remote" is used overseas; "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
OrgJam Original Jam
Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print
jobs to be distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and
Palm 2
allows files to moved around, combined, and converted to different
formats.
PC Personal Computer
Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages
PGS count as two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT
counter SP is switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
114
System Service Mode
PrtPGS Print Pages
Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This
R
machine is under development and currently not available.
RCG Remote Communication Gate
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8 counters are
SMC
recorded in the SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
• All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.
115
8 191 T:Total Scan PGS

These SPs count the pages scanned by each
8 192 C:Total Scan PGS application that uses the scanner to scan
images.
8 193 F:Total Scan PGS
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 195 S:Total Scan PGS
CTL
The L: counters work differently case by case.
Sometimes, they count jobs/pages stored on
the document server Sometimes, they include
8 196 L:Total Scan PGS occasions when the user uses a file that is
already on the document server.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the number of physical pages.
• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts to adjust color.
• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.
• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.
• Scans made in SP mode are not counted.
Examples
• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but not stored, the S: count
is 4.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server using the Store File
button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L: count is 6.
• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.
• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.
T:LSize Scan PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan and
8 201 copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission is not counted.
• These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
F:LSize Scan PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 203
These SPs count the number of large pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.
116
System Service Mode
S:LSize Scan PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for scan jobs
8 205 only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission is not counted.
• These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the User Tools display.
ADF Org Feeds CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 221 These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front and back side
scanning.
Number of front sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF/ARDF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for either
simplex or duplex scanning.
001 Front
With an ADF/ARDF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Front side count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
front side scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the
user loads face up.)
Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF/ARDF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex
002 Back scanning.
With an ADF/ARDF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the
Back count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-
side scanning.
• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back count is 1.
• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid double counting. Also,
the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheet is output.
117
8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL These SPs count the number of pages
scanned using a TWAIN driver. These
counters reveal how the TWAIN driver is
used for delivery functions.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL
• At the present time, these counters

perform identical counts.
8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL

These SPs count the number of pages
8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL stamped with the stamp in the ADF unit.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL
T:Scan PGS/Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 301 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by all applications. Use
these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page size
[SP 8-441].
C:Scan PGS/Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 302 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copy application.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output (printing) page
size [SP 8-442].
F:Scan PGS/Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 303 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Fax application.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-443].
S:Scan PGS/Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 305 These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scan application.
Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP
8-445].
L:Scan PGS/Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 306 The L: counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages
stored on the document server Sometimes, they include occasions when the user uses
a file that is already on the document server.
118
System Service Mode
001 A3
002 A4
003 A5
004 B4
005 B5
006 DLT
-
007 LG
008 LT
009 HLT
010 Full Bleed
254 Other (Standard)
255 Other (Custom)
8 381 T:Total PrtPGS CTL
8 382 C:Total PrtPGS CTL These SPs count the number of pages
8 383 F:Total PrtPGS CTL printed by the customer. The counter for the
application used for storing the pages
8 384 P:Total PrtPGS CTL increments.
8 385 S:Total PrtPGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 387 O:Total PrtPGS CTL
• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLT page is counted
as 2.
• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages stored is counted for the
application that stored them.
• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine, so the following
pages are not counted as printed pages:
Blank pages in a duplex printing job.
Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip sheets.
Reports printed to confirm counts.
119
All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, engine maintenance reports, etc.)
Test prints for machine image adjustment.
Error notification reports.
Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.
LSize PrtPGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.
8 391
• In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are also
displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
This SP counts the amount of paper (front/

back counted as 1 page) used for duplex
8 411 Prints/Duplex CTL printing. Last pages printed only on one side
are not counted.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 421 These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 422 These SPs count by binding and combining, and n-Up settings the number of pages
processed for printing by the copier application.
F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the printer application.
S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by the scanner application.
120
System Service Mode
L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
stored on the document server Sometimes, they include occasions when the user uses a
file that is already on the document server.
O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

processed for printing by Other applications
001 Simplex> Duplex -
002 Duplex> Duplex -
003 Book> Duplex -
004 Simplex Combine -
005 Duplex Combine -
006 2in1 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)
012 Booklet -
013 Magazine -
014 2in1+Booklet -
015 4in1+Booklet -
016 6in1+Booklet -
017 8in1+Booklet -
018 9in1+Booklet -
019 2in1+Magazine -
020 4in1+Magazine -
121
021 6in1+Magazine -
022 8in1+Magazine -
023 9in1+Magazine -
024 16in1+Magazine -
• These counts (SP8-421 to SP8-427) are especially useful for customers who need to improve their
compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paper consumption.
• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1 page.
• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:
Booklet Magazine
Original Original
Count Count
Pages Pages
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 2 3 2
4 2 4 2
5 3 5 4
6 4 6 4
7 4 7 4
8 4 8 4
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 441 These SPs count by the number of the page classified by paper size. The page is
printed by all applications.
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

printed by the copy application.
122
System Service Mode
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

printed by the printer applications.
S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

printed by the scanner applications.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

printed by Other applications.
001 A3
002 A4
003 A5
004 B4
005 B5
-
006 DLT
007 LG
008 LT
009 HLT
010 Full Bleed
254 Other (Standard)

-
255 Other (Custom)
123
• These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.
PrtPGS/Ppr Tray CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 451
These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.
001 Bypass Bypass Tray
002 Tray 1 Copier
003 Tray 2 Copier
004 Tray 3 Copier
005 Tray 4 Currently not used.
T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by all applications.
• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter is based on
8 461 feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feed rollers. However,
these counts are based on output timing.
• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.
• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and a page
printed on one side counts as 1.
124
System Service Mode
C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 462
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copy application.
F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 463
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the fax application.
P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 464
These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printer application.
L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Normal
002 Recycled
003 Special
004 Thick
005 Normal (Back)
006 Thick (Back)
007 OHP
008 Other
T:PrtPGS/Emul CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 511
Printed by all applications.
P:PrtPGS/Emul CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 514
Printed by the printer application.
001 RPCS
002 RPDL
003 PS3
004 R98
125
005 R16
006 GL/GL2
007 R55
008 RTIFF
009 PDF
010 PCL5e/5c
011 PCL XL
012 IPDL-C
013 BM-Links
014 Other
015 IPDS
T:PrtPGS/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 521 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by all
applications.
C:PrtPGS/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 522 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Copy
application.
F:PrtPGS/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Fax
8 523 application.
• Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.
P:PrtPGS/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 524 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Print
application.
126
System Service Mode
S:PrtPGS/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 525 These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the Scanner
application.
L:PrtPGS/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Sort
002 Stack
003 Staple
004 Booklet
005 Z-Fold
006 Punch
007 Other
008 Inside-Fold
009 Three-IN-Fold
010 Three-OUT-Fold
011 Four-Fold
012 KANNON-Fold
013 Perfect-Bind
014 Ring-Bind
• If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling, the unstapled pages are
still counted.
• The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are
counted.
127
Staples
8 531
-
T:PrtBooks/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 551
C:PrtBooks/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 552
P:PrtBooks/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 554
L:PrtBooks/FIN CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Perfect-Bind
002 Ring-Bind
T:A Sheet Of Paper CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 561
C:A Sheet Of Paper CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 562
Printed by the copy application.
F:A Sheet Of Paper CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 563
Printed by the fax application.
P:A Sheet Of Paper CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 564
L:A Sheet Of Paper CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
128
System Service Mode
O:A Sheet Of Paper

8 567
Printed by Other application.
001 Total: Over A3/DLT
002 Total: Under A3/DLT
003 Duplex: Over A3/DLT
004 Duplex: Under A3/DLT
T:Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 581 This SP counts the total output broken down by color output, regardless of the
application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters
are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.
001 Total
8 591 O:Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 A3/DLT These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use,
number of duplex pages printed, and the number of
002 Duplex staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)
applications only.
8 601 T: Coverage Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 B/W Displays the total coverage of each mode.
011 B/W Printing Pages Displays the number of the printouts in each mode.
8 602 C: Coverage Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 B/W
8 603 F: Coverage Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 B/W
8 604 P: Coverage Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 B/W
129
8 606 L: Coverage Counter CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 B/W
8 617 SDK Apli Counter
001 - 006 SDK-1 to -6
8 621 Func Use Counter
001 - 064 Function-001 to -064
T:FAX TX PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 631 This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone
number.
F:FAX TX PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 633 This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to a telephone
number.
001 B/W
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as
B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8631 and SP8633
are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:IFAX TX PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 641 This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as fax images using
I-Fax.
130
System Service Mode
F:IFAX TX PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 643 This SP counts by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as fax images using I-
Fax.
001 B/W
• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages are counted separately as
B/W or Color.
• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only so SP8641 and SP8643
are the same.
• The counts include error pages.
• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission, the count is done for
each destination.
• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.
• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each destination.
T:S-to-Email PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 651 This SP counts by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for
both the Scan and document server applications.
S:S-to-Email PGS CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 655 This SP counts by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the
Scan application only.
001 B/W
002 Color
• The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is stored on the HDD. If the job is
cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not counted.
• If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses, the count is 10 (the pages
are sent to the same SMTP server together).
• If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, the count is 50 (the document is
sent to each destination of the SMB/FTP server).
• Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to a
large number of destinations, the count may be divided and counted separately. For example, if a
10-page document is sent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations and the
count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).
131
T:Deliv PGS/Svr CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 661 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by both Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/Svr CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 665 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a Scan Router
server by the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
• The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on the HDD of the Scan Router
server.
• If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes, the count is not done.
• The count is executed even if there is confirmation of the arrival at the Scan Router server.
T:Deliv PGS/PC CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

8 671 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folder on a PC
(Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.
S:Deliv PGS/PC CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 675 These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC with
the Scan application.
001 B/W
002 Color
• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the count.
• If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages stored is counted for the
application that stored them.
• When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is done for the number of
pages sent to each destination.
132
System Service Mode
8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS CTL These SPs count the number of pages sent by PC
Fax. These SPs are provided for the Fax
application only, so the counts for SP8-681 and
8 683 F:PCFAX TXPGS CTL SP8-683 are the same.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PC through the copier to the
destination.
• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting, the pages are only
counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes
up by 10, not 20.)
TX PGS/Port CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 701 These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used to send them. For
example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations via ISDN G4, the count for
ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.
001 PSTN-1 -
002 PSTN-2 -
003 PSTN-3 -
004 ISDN (G3,G4) -
005 Network -
8 711 T:Scan PGS/Comp CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
S:Scan PGS/Comp CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]

8 715
These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.
-001 JPEG/JPEG2000 -
TIFF M/S (Multi/

-002 -
Single)
-003 PDF -
-004 Other -
-005 PDF/Comp -
-006 PDF/A -
133
8 721 T:Deliv PGS/WSD
8 725 S:Deliv PGS/WSD

CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 731 T:Scan PGS/Media
8 735 S:Scan PGS/Media
-001 B/W -
-002 Color -
RX PGS/Port [0 to 9999999/ 0 / 1]
8741 These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical port used to receive
them.
001 PSTN-1
002 PSTN-2
003 PSTN-3
004 ISDN (G3,G4)
005 Network
Dev Counter CTL [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

8 771
This SP counts the total number of developed images.
001 Total
Toner Bottle Info. *BICU [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

8 781
This SP counts the total number of developed images.
001 BK
134
System Service Mode
Toner Remain CTL [0 to 100 / 0 / 1]
This SP displays the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SP allows the user
to check the toner supply at any time.
8 801
• This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps) is better
than other machines on the market that can only measure in increments of 10
(10% steps).
001 K
8 811 Eco Counter CTL
001 Eco Total
004 Duplex
005 Combine
008 Duplex (%)
009 Combine (%)
010 Paper Cut (%)

[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
101 Eco Total: Last
104 Duplex: Last
105 Combine: Last
108 Duplex(%):Last
109 Combine(%):Last
110 Paper Cut(%):Last
Cvr Cnt:0-10% *BICU [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

8 851 These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage of each color
is from 0% to 10%.
011 0-2%:Bk
021 3-4%: Bk
135
031 5-7%: Bk
041 8-10%: Bk
Cvr Cnt: 11-20% *BICU [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

is from 11% to 20%.
001 Bk
Cvr Cnt: 21-30% *BICU [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

is from 21% to 30%.
001 Bk
Cvr Cnt: 31%- *BICU [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

is 31% or higher.
001 Bk
Page/Toner Bottle *BICU [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

8 891
This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application.
001 Bk
Page/Toner k Prev1 *BICU [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

8 901 This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application with the
previously replaced units.
001 Bk
Page/Toner k Prev2 *BICU [0 to 99999999/ 0 / 1]

8 911 This SP displays the number of sheets output by the scan application with the unit
replaced before the previously replaced unit (two steps back from the current unit).
136
System Service Mode
001 Bk
8 921 Cvr Cnt/Total *BICU
[0 to 2147483647 / 0 / 1]
001 Coverage(%): BK These SPs display the total coverage percentage of sheets
output by the machine.
[0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
011 Coverage/P: Bk These SPs display the total coverage pages output by the
machine.
Machine Status CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
8 941 These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operation mode. These
SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machine operation for
improvement of their compliance with ISO Standards.
Engine operation time. Does not include time while

001 Operation Time controller is saving data to HDD (while engine is not
operating).
Engine not operating. Includes time while controller saves

002 Standby Time data to HDD. Does not include time spent in Energy
Save, Low Power, or Off modes.
Includes time while the machine is performing

003 Energy Save Time
background printing.
Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.

004 Low Power Time Includes time while machine is performing background
printing.
Includes time while machine is performing background

005 Off Mode Time printing. Does not include time machine remains
powered off with the power switches.
006 SC Total down time due to SC errors.
007 PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.
008 OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.
009 Supply PM Unit End Total down time due to toner end.
137
8 961 Electricity Status CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0 / 1]
001 Ctrl Standby Time
002 STR Time
003 Main Power Off Time
004 Reading and Printing Time
005 Printing Time
006 Reading Time
007 Eng Waiting Time
008 Low Pawer State Time
009 Silent State Time
Admin. Counter List CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1]

8 999
Displays the user setting counter for administrator.
001 Total -
003 Copy: BW -
007 Printer: BW -
010 FaxP: BW -
013 Duplex -
023 Copy: BW(%) -
027 Printer: BW(%) -
030 Fax Print: BW(%) -
101 SedTtl: FC -
102 SendTtl: BW -
103 FaxSend -
104 FaxSend: BW -
105 FaxSend: BW -
138
System Service Mode
SP-9XXX (Etc)
9001 Right Door Detect [0 to 1 / 0 ]
001 0: NOT SET 1: SET Selects the right door open/close SW ON/OFF
9901 Fusing Temperature Setting
[0 to 99 / 17 / 1 mm/step ]
010 Heater Force OFF Timing Sets the forced the heater OFF time after paper-
through.
[0 to 50 / 16 / 1 deg/step ]
Thresh: Warming-up Low
011 Sets the basic temperature for determination of the
Temperature
condition on machine-startup.
[0 to 999 / 5 / 1 sec/step ]
012 Disable Change Time
Unused. DO NOT change the setting.
[0 to 999 / 15 / 1 sec/step ]
When the wait time is over this SP’s time, the following
three items are reset:
013 Total Count Clear Time
• Control cycle on printing,
• Repeat-temperature correction,
• CPM-down counter
[0 to 999 / 60 / 1 sec/step ]
014 Print Prepare Time
Sets the print preparation time.
Target Temp revise (Temp)

9902
Sets the fusing additional temperature for the temperature correction. (Pattern A)
001 Added Temp: T1 [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 deg/step ]
139
140
System Service Mode
Target Temp revise (Time)

9903
Sets the fusing additional time for the temperature correction. (Pattern A)
001 Added Time: S1 [0 to 999 / 10 / 1 sec/step ]
141
9915 Fuser Reload Setting [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
0: Normal / 1: Force Time

001
Sets the way of fusing reload.
9930 Toner control NV Data [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 sheet/step ]
This SP’s count is used as the flag of toner bottle replacement notice.
008 When the value becomes more than 1000, the notice will occur and the value will be
cleared.
9946 Fusing Jam Exist [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step ]
0: Not fusing jam existing / 1: Fusing jam existing

001
This SP tells whether a fusing jam exists or not.
9947 Fuser SC
001 Number [0 to 999 / 0 / 1/step ]
002 Detail [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step ]
142
System Service Mode
9948 Fusing Jam Detection [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step ]
Fusing jam succession occurring counter.

A fusing jam is counted as +1. When paper ejection process is done normally, the
001
counter will be reset.
SC will occur when the counter become 3.
Soft Start: Start

9960
Soft start parameter on system start-up
001 First duty [0 to 100 / 15 / 0.01 %/step ]
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 50 / 0.01 %/step ]
004 Repeat count [0 to 255 / 5 / 1/step ]
Soft Start: Print

9961
Soft start parameter on paper pass process
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 65 / 0.01 %/step ]
Soft Stop: Print

9962
Soft stop parameter on paper pass process
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 10 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 30 / 0.01 %/step ]
143
Soft Start: Wait

9963
Soft start parameter on wait time
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 50 / 0.01 %/step ]
Soft Stop: Wait

9964
Soft stop parameter on wait time
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 10 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 30 / 0.01 %/step ]
Soft Start: Print

9966
Soft start parameter on paper pass process
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 65 / 0.01 %/step ]
Soft Stop: Print

9967
Soft stop parameter on paper pass process
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 10 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 30 / 0.01 %/step ]
144
System Service Mode
Soft Start: Wait

9968
Soft start parameter on wait time
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 5 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 50 / 0.01 %/step ]
Soft Stop: Wait

9969
Soft stop parameter on wait time
002 Duty step [0 to 100 / 10 / 0.01 %/step ]
003 Last duty [0 to 100 / 30 / 0.01 %/step ]
Input Check (SP5-803)
Conducting Input Check

1. Select SP5-803.
2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component.
3. Select "Start" The copy mode is activated.
4. The sign "01H" or "00H" is displayed (see the table below).
Input Check Table
Num. Sensor/Switch 1h (00000001) 0h (00000000)
009 Tray 1: Paper End Sensor Paper detected Not detected
016 By-pass: Paper End Sensor Paper detected Not detected
019 Paper Exit Sensor Paper detected Not detected
145
022 Registration Sensor Paper detected Not detected
023 Interchange Sensor Paper detected Not detected
027 Front Safety SW – 24V Closed Open
031 CTL Fan Lock Locked Not locked
033 Fan Lock Locked Not locked
035 Main Motor Lock Normal Abnormal
037 PCU Set Set Not Set
039 Key Card Set Set Not Set
040 Mechanical Counter Set Set Not Set
041 Key Counter Set See the table below
042 BCU Version See the table below
051 Bypass Tray Check Set Not Set
053 Cover Right Check Open Closed
087 Bank1 SNS Paper detected Not detected
088 Bank2 SNS Paper detected Not detected
092 Bank1 PE Paper detected Not detected
093 Bank2 PE Paper detected Not detected
094 Bank1 Cover Open Closed
095 Bank2 Cover Open Closed
200 Scanner HP Sensor In Home Position Out of Home Position
201 Platen Cover Sensor Open Closed
* The items using more than 2 bits
Num. Sensor/Switch Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Set Detected Set Detected

041 Key Counter Set -
1 2
146
System Service Mode
Num. Sensor/Switch Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
042 BCU Version Ver.1 Ver.2 Ver.3
Output Check (SP5-804)
Conducting Output Check
• To prevent mechanical or electrical damage, do not keep an electrical component on for a long
time.
1. Select SP5-804.
2. Select the number (see the table below) corresponding to the component.
3. Select "ON."
4. To stop the operation, select "OFF."
Output Check Table
Num. Component
001 Main Motor: CW: High
003 Main Motor: CCW: High
020 Toner Bottle Motor
025 Exhaust Fan Motor: High
026 Exhaust Fan Motor: Low
028 CTL Fan
032 Registration CL
033 1st Paper Feed CL
040 Fusing SOL
041 Dehumidification Heater
042 P.P.: Image Transfer: -
147
Num. Component
043 P.P.: Image Transfer: +
044 P.P.: Separation Voltage
045 P.P.: Development
046 P.P.: Charge
047 P Sensor
048 Anti-static LED
049 Polygon Motor
051 LD
052 Duplex Motor CW
053 Duplex Motor CCW
055 Bypass Feed Clutch
163 Bank1 Motor
164 Bank2 Motor
169 Bank1 Clutch
170 Bank2 Clutch
202 Scanner Lamp: Color 600
203 Scanner Lamp: Color 1200
204 Scanner Lamp: Bk
When checking Fan Motor High (005) or Fan Motor Low (006) note the following:
• These motors may not respond when the fusing temperature is high.
• Selecting "ON" checks that one of these motors normally operates. Selecting "OFF" turns off the
motor that you have started by selecting "ON." However, this does not guarantee that the motor
normally stops during normal operation.
148
System Service Mode
Printer Service Mode (Print SP Tables)
Service Mode Table
1001 Bit Switch
001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 No I/O Timeout 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. Enabled: The MFP I/O Timeout setting will
have no affect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit 4 SD Card Save Mode 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enabled: Print jobs will be saved to an SD Card in the GW SD slot ( "Card Save
Function" in the service tables of Field Service Manual).
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 [RPCS,PCL]: Printable area frame border 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enable: The machine prints all RPCS and PCL jobs with a border on the edges of the
printable area.
1001 Bit Switch
149
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 Applying a collate Type Shift Collate Normal Collate
A collation type (shift or normal) will be applied to all jobs that do not already have
a 'Collate Type' configured.
• If #5-0 is enabled, this Bit Switch has no effect.
bit 3 [PCL5e/c,PS]: PDL Auto Switching 0: Enable 1: Disable
Disabled: The MFPs ability to change the PDL processor mid-job.

Some host systems submit jobs that contain both PS and PCL5e/c. If Auto PDL
switching is disabled, these jobs will not be printed properly.
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
150
System Service Mode
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 [PCL5e/c]: Legacy HP compatibility 0: Disable 1: Enable
Enabled: Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.
In other words, the left margin defined in the job (usually "<ESC>*r0A") will be
changed to "<ESC>*r1A"
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
004 Bit Switch 4 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch
151
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 Multiple copies if a paper size or type mismatch Disabled Enabled

occurs (single (multiple)
copy)
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this BitSw, the device can be configured to
print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 [PS] PS Criteria Pattern3 Pattern1
Change the number of PS criterion used by the PS interpreter to determine whether a

job is PS data or not.
Pattern3: includes most PS commands.
Pattern1: A small number of PS tags and headers
bit 4 Increase max number of the stored jobs to 1000 Disable Enable
RTB 31
jobs. (100) (1000)
Bit 4: Should be 750 jobs
Enabled: Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD via
Job Type settings to 1000. The default is 100.
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 Method for determining the image rotation for the

Disable Enable
edge to bring on
Enabled: The image rotation will be performed as they were in the specifications of
older models for the binding of pages of mixed orientation jobs. The old models are
below:
-PCL-: Pre-04A models
bit 7 Letterhead mode printing Enable

Disable
(Duplex)
Routes all pages through the duplex unit. If this is disabled, simplex pages or the last
page of an odd-paged duplex job, are not routed through the duplex unit. This could
result in problems with letterhead / pre-printed pages.
152
System Service Mode
1001 Bit Switch
1001 Bit Switch
1001 Bit Switch
bit 0 DFU - -
bit 1 DFU - -
bit 2 DFU - -
bit 3 DFU - -
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1003 3 Clear Setting

-
Delete Program
1004 1 Print Summary Prints the service summary sheet.

Print Printer Summary (An error log is printed in addition to the
configuration page)
1005 2 Display Version Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1006 1 Sample/Locked print [0: Link with Doc. srv, 1: Enable]

Enables and disables the document server. When
you select "0" the document server is enabled or
disables in accordance with copy service mode
SP5-967. When you select "1" the document server
is enabled regardless of service mode SP5-967.
153
1110 2 Media Print Device Setting [0: Disabled 1: Enabled]

Sets I/F (USB/SD device) Enabled/Disabled on the
media print function.
SP Modes Related to Printer Controller

The following SP modes are located in the system SP mode. Refer to section 5.1 of the main unit service
manual.
SP No. Description Function and Setting
Resets data for process control and all software counters, and
5801
Memory All Clear returns all modes and adjustments to their defaults values.
-001
Section "Memory Clear" in this chapter for details.
Plug & Play Maker/ Selects the brand name and the production name for Windows
5907
Model Name Plug & Play. This information is stored in NVRAM.
Self-Diagnose Result
7832 Displays the controller self-diagnostic result.
Display
Scanner Program Mode Table (Scanner SP Tables)
Service Table Key
Notation What it means
[range / default / Example: [-9 to +9 / +3.0 / 0.1 mm step]. The setting can be adjusted in the
step] range ±9, value reset to +3.0 after an NVRAM reset, and the value can be
changed in 0.1 mm steps with each key press.
italics Comments added for your reference.
* This value is stored in NVRAM. After a RAM reset, the default value (factory
setting) is restored.
DFU Denotes "Design or Factory Use". Do not change this value.
154
System Service Mode
SP1 Mode Number Function and [Setting]
1001* 5 Scan NV Version Displays the scanner NV version.

This shows as following: Function name _ Model
name _ Version
1005* 1 Erase Margin (Remote Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned
Scan) Range from 0 to 5 image.
mm The margin color (Black or White) depends on color-
tone and invert settings.
[0 to 5 / 0mm / 1mm step]
1009* 1 Remote Scan disable Enables or disables the network TWAIN scanner
function.
[0: Enable, 1: Disable]
1010* 1 Non Display ClearLight Sets the clear light PDF display ON/OFF
PDF [0: OFF 1: ON]
1011* 1 Org Count Disp Sets the original counter display ON/OFF
[0: OFF 1: ON]
1012 1 User Info Release Clears or does not clear user information after a job.
[0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: Not clear, 1: Clear
1013 2 Scan to Media Device Sets "Scan To Multi Media" function ON/OFF.
Setting [0 or 1 / 1 / - ]
0: OFF, 1: ON
SP Number/Name Function and [Setting]
Compression level (grayscale)

2
0
These SP codes set the compression ratio for the grayscale or full color processing mode that can be
2
selected with the notch settings on the operation panel.
1
Range: 5 (lowest ratio) 95 (highest ratio)
Comp1:
5-95
1 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1/step]
(Middle I-
Qual)
155
Comp2:
5-95
2 [5 to 95 / 40 / 1/step]
(High I-
Qual)
Comp3:
5-95
3 [5 to 95 / 65 / 1/step]
(Low I-
Qual)
Comp4:
5-95
4 [5 to 95 / 80 / 1/step]
(Highest I-
Qual)
Comp5:
5-95
5 [5 to 95 / 95 / 1/step]
(Lowest I-
Qual)
Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF
2024 These SP codes set the compression ratio for the clear light PDF processing mode.
1 Compression Ratio (Normal) [5 to 95 / 25 / 1/step]
2 Compression Ratio (High) [5 to 95 / 20 / 1/step]
Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF JPEG2000
2025 These SP codes set the compression ratio for the clear light PDF processing mode (For
JPEG 2000).
Compression Ratio (Normal)

1 [5 to 95 / 25 / 1/step]
JPEG2000
2 Compression Ratio (High) JPEG2000 [5 to 95 / 20 / 1/step]
156
System Service Mode
For the settings of the image quality, see the copier SP-mode table.
157
158
4. Appendix: Fax Troubleshooting
Guide
Fax Error Codes

• If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem
as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the
service report.
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
• Check the line connection.

• The machine at the other end may be incompatible.
DIS/NSF not detected within
0-00 • Replace the NCU or FCU.
40 s of Start being pressed
• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
• If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.
• The other party is out of paper or has a jammed

0-01 DCN received unexpectedly printer.
• The other party pressed Stop during communication.
Incompatible modem at the

0-03 The other terminal is incompatible.
other end

• Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• Replace the FCU.
• The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
CFR or FTT not received after another machine.
0-04
modem training • If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may be a
bad line.
Cross reference
Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode
159

• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.
Modem training fails even G3 • Replace the FCU.
0-05
shifts down to 2400 bps. • Check for line problems.
Cross reference
See error code 0-04.

• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
settings.
• Replace the NCU or FCU.
The other terminal did not
0-06 • The other end may be defective or incompatible; try
reply to DCS
sending to another machine.
• Check for line problems.
Cross reference

No post-message response • The other end may have jammed or run out of paper.
0-07 from the other end after a • The other end user may have disconnected the call.
page was sent
• Check for a bad line.
• The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
160
Fax Error Codes

• The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
The other end sent RTN or PIN settings.
after receiving a page, • The other end may have a defective modem/NCU/
0-08
because there were too many FCU; try sending to another machine.
errors
• Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated Tx parameters in Service Program Mode
• Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try

sending to another machine.
• Noisy line: resend.
Non-standard post message • Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer
0-14 settings.
response code received
Cross reference
The other terminal is not capable of accepting the

following functions, or the other terminal’s memory is full.
The other terminal is not • Confidential rx
0-15
capable of specific functions.
• Transfer function
• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
161

settings.
CFR or FTT not detected after
• The other end may have disconnected, or it may be
0-16 modem training in confidential
defective; try calling another machine.
or transfer mode
• If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a line
problem.
Cross reference

• Check for line problems.
• Try calling another fax machine.
Facsimile data not received
0-20 • Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first line
within 6 s of retraining
and/or rx cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &

line.
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
EOL signal (end-of-line) from • Replace the NCU or FCU.
the other end not received
0-21 • The remote machine may be defective or may have
within 5 s of the previous EOL
signal disconnected.
Cross reference
Maximum interval between EOLs and between ECM
frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
162
Fax Error Codes

• Defective remote terminal.
The signal from the other end
was interrupted for more than
0-22 • Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier drop
the acceptable modem carrier
drop time (default: 200 ms) time.
Cross reference
Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch 0A, bits
0 and 1

Too many errors during • Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.
0-23
reception • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/or rx
error criteria.
Cross reference
Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0 and 1

The other terminal did not settings.
0-30 reply to NSS(A) in AI short
• The other terminal may not be compatible.
protocol mode
Cross reference
Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4
The other terminal sent a DCS,

which contained functions that • Check the protocol dump list.
0-32
the receiving machine cannot • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
handle.
The data reception (not ECM) • Check the line connection.

0-33 is not completed within 10 • The other terminal may have a defective
minutes. modem/NCU/FCU.
163
Polarity changed during • Check the line connection.

0-52
communication Retry communication.
• FCU firmware or board defective.

0-55 FCU does not detect the SG3.
• SG3 firmware or board defective.
The stored message data

0-56 exceeds the capacity of the • SG3 firmware or board defective.
mailbox in the SG3.
• The other terminal did not have a compatible

The communication mode
communication mode (e.g., the other terminal was a
specified in CM/JM was not
V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
0-70 available
• A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminal
(V.8 calling and called
when polling rx was initiated from the calling
terminal)
terminal.
• The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due to

The calling terminal fell back to noise, etc.
T.30 mode, because it could • ANSam was too short to detect.
0-74
not detect ANSam after
sending CI. • Check the line connection and condition.
• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
The called terminal fell back to • The terminal could not detect ANSam.
T.30 mode, because it could
0-75 • Check the line connection and condition.
not detect a CM in response to
ANSam (ANSam timeout). • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
The calling terminal fell back to • The called terminal could not detect a CM due to
T.30 mode, because it could noise, etc.
0-76 not detect a JM in response to
CM • Check the line connection and condition.
(CM timeout). • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
• The calling terminal could not detect a JM due to

The called terminal fell back to noise, etc.
T.30 mode, because it could
• A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot pass
0-77 not detect a CJ in response to
JM to the other end.
JM
• Check the line connection and condition.
(JM timeout).
• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
164
Fax Error Codes
The called terminal detected • Check for line noise or other line problems.
0-79 CI while waiting for a V.21 • If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back to T.
signal. 30 mode.
The line was disconnected due • The guard timer expired while starting these phases.
0-80 to a timeout in V.34 phase 2 – Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or low signal level
line probing. can cause these errors.
If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
The line was disconnected due
0-81 to a timeout in V.34 phase 3 – • Try making a call at a later time.
equalizer training. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using dedicated
tx parameters.
The line was disconnected due
0-82 to a timeout in the V.34 phase • Try increasing the tx level.
4 – control channel start-up. • Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.
If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
The line was disconnected due • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.
0-83 to a timeout in the V.34 control • Try increasing the tx level.
channel restart sequence. • Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same error
is frequent when receiving from multiple senders.
The line was disconnected due • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
to abnormal signaling in V.34
0-84 • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
phase 4 – control channel
start-up. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The line was disconnected due • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
0-85 to abnormal signaling in V.34 • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
control channel restart. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.
The line was disconnected

because the other terminal
requested a data rate using • The other terminal was incompatible.
0-86
MPh that was not available in • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
the currently selected symbol
rate.
165
• The receiving terminal restarted the control channel

The control channel started because data reception in the primary channel was
0-87 after an unsuccessful primary not successful.
channel.
• This does not result in an error communication.
The line was disconnected

because PPR was transmitted/ • Try using a lower data rate at the start.
0-88
received 9 (default) times • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
within the same ECM frame.
Only one V.21 connection flag

2-11 • Replace the FCU.
was received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU.
• Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

2-13 Modem initialization error • Update the modem ROM.
JBIG compression or
2-23 • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
reconstruction error
2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
JBIG data reconstruction error

2-25
(BIH error)

2-26 • JBIG data error
(Float marker error)
• Check the sender’s JBIG function.
2-27 • Update the MBU ROM.
(End marker error)

2-28
(Timeout)
• FCU defective
2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker error
• Check the destination device.
The machine resets itself for a • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
2-50
fatal FCU system error FCU.
166
Fax Error Codes
The machine resets itself

• If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace the
2-51 because of a fatal
FCU.
communication error
Snd msg() in the manual task is

• The user did the same operation many times, and this
2-53 an error because the mailbox
gave too much load to the machine.
for the operation task is full.
• Check the line connector.

4-01 Line current was cut • Check for line problems.
• Replace the FCU or the NCU.
Communication failed because

of an ID Code mismatch • Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIs
4-10 (Closed Network) or Tel. programmed correctly, then resend.
No./CSI mismatch (Protection • The machine at the other end may be defective.
against Wrong Connections)
5-10 DCR timer expired • Replace the FCU.
Storage impossible because of

5-20 • Temporary memory shortage.
a lack of memory
• Test the SAF memory.
5-21 Memory overflow
Print data error when printing • Test the SAF memory.

5-23 a substitute rx or confidential rx
message • Ask the other end to resend the message.
• Replace an SD card or HDD.

5-25 SAF file access error
G3 ECM - T1 time out during

6-00
reception of facsimile data
• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.
G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was
received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was received

6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected • Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
167

• Check for a bad line or defective remote terminal.
G3 ECM - facsimile data
frame not received within 18 s • Replace the FCU.
6-05
of CFR, but there was no line • Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer
fail
Cross reference
• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
G3 ECM - coding/decoding • Defective FCU.

6-06
error • The other terminal may be defective.
G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in • The other end pressed Stop during communication.
6-08
reply to PPS.NULL • The other terminal may be defective.
• Check for a noisy line.

6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Adjust the tx levels of the communicating machines.
• See code 6-05.
• Check for line noise.

G3 ECM - error frames still • Adjust the tx level (use NCU parameter 01 or the
received at the other end after dedicated tx parameter for that address).
6-10
all communication attempts at
2400 bps • Check the line connection.
V.21 flag detected during high

6-21 • The other terminal may be defective or incompatible.
speed modem communication
The machine resets the • Check for line noise.

sequence because of an
6-22 • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the FCU.
abnormal handshake in the V.
34 control channel • Defective remote terminal.
V.21 signal not stopped within

6s
• Double registration of the SIP user name.

SIP user name registration
13-17 • Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP server
error
is not sufficient.
168
Fax Error Codes
• Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.

13-18 SIP server access error
• Defective SIP server.
SIP authentication password • The input password for the authentication does not
13-24
error match the password registered in the SIP server.
• Error occurred during sending to the SMTP server.

Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to 16. For
14-00 SMTP Send Error
example, the mail address of the system
administrator is not registered.
• Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)

because the server could not be found.
• The PC is not ready to transfer files.
14-01 SMTP Connection Failed • SMTP server not functioning correctly.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
• Destination folder selection not correct.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the destination

for direct SMTP sending is not correct.
• Contact the system administrator and check that the
No Service by SMTP Service
14-02 SMTP server has the correct settings and operates
(421)
correctly.
• Contact the system administrator for direct SMTP
sending and check the sending destination.
169
• Failed to access the SMTP server because the access

is denied.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact the
system administrator to determine if there is a
problem with the SMTP server and to check that the
SMTP server settings are correct.
• Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact the
Access to SMTP Server Denied
14-03 system administrator to determine that the SMTP
(450)
server settings and path to the server are correct.
• Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the user name
and password settings are correct.
• Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the system
administrator to determine if there is a problem at the
destination at that the settings at the destination are
correct.
Access to SMTP Server Denied • SMTP server operating incorrectly

14-04
(550) • Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly
• Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDD

on the server is full.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD of the SMTP
server. Contact the system administrator and check
the amount of space remaining on the SMTP server
HDD.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD where the
14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full (452) destination folder is located. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the HDD where the target folder is
located.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target
destination for SMTP direct sending. Contact the
system administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the target HDD.
170
Fax Error Codes
• The designated user does not exist.

• The designated user does not exist on the SMTP
User Not Found on SMTP
14-06 server.
Server (551)
• The designated address is not for use with direct
SMTP sending.
• Failed to access the SMTP server because the

transmission failed.
• PC not operating correctly.
Data Send to SMTP Server • SMTP server operating incorrectly
14-07
Failed (4XX)
• Destination folder setting incorrect.
• Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
• Failed to access the SMTP server because the

transmission failed.
Data Send to SMTP Server • SMTP server operating incorrectly

14-08
Failed (5XX) • Destination folder setting incorrect.
• Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
• Software application error.
Authorization Failed for • POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.

14-09
Sending to SMTP Server • Incorrect setting for file transfer
• Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limit

14-10 Addresses Exceeded
for the SMTP server.
• The send buffer is full so the transmission could not

be completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-to-
14-11 Buffer Full
Email while the buffer is being used send mail at the
same time.
• Transmission was cancelled because the detected

14-12 Data Size Too Large
size of the file was too large.
• Processing is interrupted because the user pressed

14-13 Send Cancelled
Stop.
• Update the software because of the defective

14-14 Security Locked File Error
software.
171
• The transmitting a mail is interrupted via DCS due to

the incorrect data.
14-15 Mail Data Error
software.
• When a mail is divided for the mail transmission and

the division number of a mail are more than the
Maximum Division Number specified number, the mail transmission is interrupted.
14-16
Error
software.

14-17 Incorrect Ticket
software.
• The access to MCS file is denied due to the no

permission of access.
14-18 Access to MCS File Error
software.
Failed to create the MCS file because:

• The number of files created with other applications
14-30 MCS File Creation Failed on the Document Server has exceeded the limit.
• HDD is full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
UFS file could not be created:

• Not enough space in UFS area to handle both Scan-
14-31 UFS File Creation Failed to-Email and IFAX transmission.
• HDD full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
Cancelled the Mail Due to • Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelled
14-32
Error Detected by NFAX due to a software error.
No Mail Address For the • Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mail
14-33
Machine address of the network administrator is registered.
172
Fax Error Codes
• Operational error in normal mail sending or direct

Address designated in the SMTP sending.
14-34 domain for SMTP sending • Check the address selected in the address book for
does not exist SMTP sending.
• Check the domain selection.
Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send was

cancelled:
14-50 Mail Job Task Error • Address book was being edited during creation of
the notification mail.
• Software error.
Not even one return notification can be downloaded:

• The address book was being edited.
UCS Destination Download
14-51 • The number for the specified destination does not
Error
exist (it was deleted or edited after the job was
created).
• The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel the

14-60 Send Cancel Failed
send operation.
Notification Mail Send Failed

14-61 • All addresses for return notification mail failed.
for All Destinations
Transmission Error due to the • When the 0 line page exists in received pages with
14-62
existence of zero line page G3 communication, the transmission is interrupted.
• At startup, the system detected that the IP address of

POP3/IMAP4 Server Not
15-01 the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registered in
Registered
the machine.
POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account • The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
15-02
Information Not Registered registered.
15-03 Mail Address Not Registered • The mail address has not been registered.
15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error • Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
173
The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be found:

• The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server is
15-11 Connection Error not stored in the machine.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:

• Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
15-12 Authorization Error • Access was attempted by another device, such as
the PC.
• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
• Occurs only during manual reception. Transmission

cannot be received due to insufficient buffer space.
15-13 Receive Buffer Full
The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-to-
Email.
• The mail header is not standard format. For example,

15-14 Mail Header Format Error
the Date line description is incorrect.
• The e-mail is not in standard format. There is no

15-15 Mail Divide Error boundary between parts of the e-mail, including the
header.
15-16 Mail Size Receive Error • The mail cannot be received because it is too large.
• May occur during manual receiving only because

15-17 Receive Timeout
the network is not operating correctly.
15-18 Incomplete Mail Received • Only one portion of the mail was received.
Final Destination for Transfer

• The format of the final destination for the transfer
15-31 Request Reception Format
request was incorrect.
Error
The transmission cannot be delivered to the final

destination:
Send/Delivery Destination
15-39 • Destination file format is incorrect.
Error
• Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
174
Fax Error Codes
• Reception rejected because the transaction

15-41 SMTP Receive Error
exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX” setting.
• The delivery destination address was specified with

15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error
Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
• Format error in the address of the Off Ramp

15-43 Address Format Error
Gateway.
• The number of addresses for the Off Ramp Gateway

15-44 Addresses Over
exceeded the limit of 30.
15-61 Attachment File Format Error • The attached file is not TIFF format.
Could not receive transmission due to:

• Resolution error
• Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
• Resolution is not supported.
15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error
• Page size error
• The page size was larger than A3.
• Compression error
• File was compressed with other than MH, MR, or
MMR.
The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be received

because the TIFF header is incorrect:
15-63 TIFF Parameter Error • The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.
• The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.
The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF

decompression error:
15-64 TIFF Decompression Error
• The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.
• The file could not be received because the

15-71 Not Binary Image Data
attachment was not binary image data.
175
• Could not find the Disposition line in the header of

15-73 MDN Status Error the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with the
firmware.
• Could not find the Original Message ID line in the

15-74 MDN Message ID Error header of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem
with the firmware.
• Could not receive the transmission because the

destination buffer is full and the destination could not
15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error be created (this error may occur when receiving a
transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
• Could not repeat receive the transmission because

the destination buffer is full and the destination could
Repeated Destination
15-81 not be created (this error may occur when receiving
Registration Error
a transfer request or a request for notification of
reception).
Could not receive the file for transfer to the final

destination:
• The format of the final destination or the transfer
15-91 Send Registration Error
destination is incorrect.
• Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
• Transmission could not be received because memory

15-92 Memory Overflow
overflowed during the transaction.
• Transaction could not complete due to a malfunction

15-93 Memory Access Error
of SAF memory.
• The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer

15-94 Incorrect ID Code request, because the ID code in the incoming e-mail
did not match the ID code registered in the machine.
• The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for transfer

15-95 Transfer Station Function
because the transfer function was unavailable.
176
Fax Error Codes
• Divide the original into more than one page.

Original length exceeded the • Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the
22-00
maximum scan length scan resolution if possible.
• Add optional page memory.
• Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.

• Delete unnecessary files from memory.
Memory overflow while • Transfer the substitute reception files to an another
22-01
receiving fax machine, if the machine’s printer is busy or out of
order.
• Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
• The job started normally but did not finish normally;

Tx or rx job stalled due to line data may or may not have been received fully.
22-02
disconnection at the other end
• Restart the machine.
The machine cannot store • Update the ROM

22-04
received data in the SAF • Replace the FCU.
No G3 parameter
22-05 • Defective FCU board or firmware.
confirmation answer
Data read timeout during • Restart the machine.

23-00
construction • Replace the FCU.
The machine software resets • Update the ROM

25-00 itself after a fatal transmission
error occurred • Replace the FCU.
F0-xx V.34 modem error • Replace the FCU.
• Update the SG3 modem ROM.

• Replace the SG3 board.
F6-xx SG3 modem error
• Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
177
IFAX Troubleshooting
• Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is
causing the problem.
Communication
Item Action [Remarks]
Route
• Check that the LAN cable is connected to the

1. Connection with the machine.
LAN
General LAN • Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
• Check that other devices connected to the LAN

2. LAN activity
can communicate through the LAN.
• Check the network settings on the PC.

[Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP properties
1. Network settings on
in the network setup correct?
the PC
• Check the IP address with the administrator of
the network.]
• Use the “ping” command on the PC to contact

2. Check that PC can the machine.
connect with the
Between IFAX and PC machine [At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the IP
address of the machine, then press Enter.]
• Check the LAN parameters

• Check if there is an IP address conflict with
3. LAN settings in the other PCs.
machine [Use the “Network” function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
• Check the LAN parameters

• Check if there is an IP address conflict with
Between machine LAN settings in the other PCs.
and e-mail server machine [Use the “Network” function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
178
IFAX Troubleshooting
Communication
Route
• Make sure that the machine can log into the e-

mail server.
1. E-mail account on
• Check that the account and password stored in
the server
the server are the same as in the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
Between machine • Make sure that the client devices which have
and e-mail server an account in the server can send/receive e-
mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
2. E-mail server
Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own number
as the destination. The machine receives the
returned e-mail if the communication is performed
successfully.]
• Make sure that the PC can log into the e-mail

server.
1. E-mail account on
• Check that the account and password stored in
the Server
the server are the same as in the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
• Make sure that the client devices which have

an account in the server can send/receive e-
mail.
Between e-mail
server and internet [Ask the administrator to check.
2. E-mail server
Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own number
as the destination. The machine receives the
returned e-mail if the communication is performed
successfully.]
• Make sure that the e-mail address is actually

3. Destination e-mail used.
address • Check that the e-mail address contains no
incorrect characters such as spaces.
179
Communication
Route
• Use the “ping” command to contact the router.

Between e-mail • Check that other devices connected to the
Router settings
server and internet router can sent data over the router.
[Ask the administrator of the server to check.]
• Check whether e-mail can be sent to another

Error message by e- address on the same network, using the
Between e-mail application e-mail software.
mail from the network
server and internet
of the destination. • Check the error e-mail message.
[Inform the administrator of the LAN.]
180
IP-Fax Troubleshooting
IP-Fax Transmission
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name
Check Point Action
1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.
2 Specified IP address/host name correct? Check the IP address/host name.
Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using

3 Firewall/NAT is installed?
another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.
5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.
Remote terminal port number setting other than

6 Send by specifying the port number.
1720?
7 Specified port number correct? Confirm the port number of the remote fax.
DNS server registered when host name

8 Contact the network administrator.
specified?
Check whether the remote fax is a T38

9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.
10 Remote fax switched off or busy? Check that the remote fax is switched on.
Request the network administrator to increase

the bandwidth.
Raise the delay level.

11 Network bandwidth too narrow?
IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS

speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
Check whether the remote fax cancelled the

12 Remote fax cancelled transmission?
transmission.
181
Cannot send via VoIP Gateway
Check Point Action
2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
Is the IP address/host name of the specified

5 Check the IP address/host name.
Gateway correct?
6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.

9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
10 DNS registered when host name specified? Contact the network administrator.
11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.
12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.
13 Remote G3 fax turned on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.

the bandwidth.
Raise the network delay level.

IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS

speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
Cannot send by Alias Fax number.
Check Point Action
182
Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.

2 Number of specified Alias fax correct?
Error Code: 13-14

3 Firewall/NAT installed?
5 Gatekeeper installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
6 Gatekeeper power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
7 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper correct? Check the IP address/host name.
DNS server registered when Gatekeeper host

name specified?
Check the settings.

9 Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0
10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.
11 Alias number of local fax registered? Register the Alias number of the local fax.
12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.
Check whether the remote fax is a T38

13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal?
terminal.
14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.
Request the system administrator to increase

the bandwidth.
Raise the delay level.

Lower the modem transmission baud rate.

IPFAX SW 05

transmission.
183
IP-Fax Reception
Cannot receive by IP Address/Host name.
Check Point Action

3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
Port number specified at remote sender fax (if

4 Request the sender to specify the port number.
required)?
5 Specified port number correct (if required)? Request the sender to check the port number.
Contact the network administrator.

6
specified on sender side?
• The sender machine displays this error
code if the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
Request the system administrator to increase the

bandwidth.
7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate on
the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06

transmission.
Cannot receive by VoIP Gateway.
Check Point Action
Cannot breach the firewall. Request the remote

2 Firewall/NAT is installed? fax to send by using another method (Fax,
Internet Fax)
184
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP address/
5
Gateway correct on sender’s side? host name.

specified on sender side?

the bandwidth.
8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.
9 G3 fax power switched on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.
Cannot receive by Alias Fax number.
Check Point Action
Cannot the breach firewall. Request the remote

2 Firewall/NAT is installed? fax to send by using another method (Fax,
Internet Fax)
3 Gatekeeper installed correctly?

• The sender machine displays this error code
when the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on?

Request the sender to check the IP address/host

name.
IP address/host name of Gatekeeper
5
correct on the sender’s side?
185

DNS server registered when Gatekeeper
6
host name specified on sender’s side?
Request the sender to check the settings.

User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0
7 Enable H.323 SW is set to on?
• Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh fax.
8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.
9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.
Request the system administrator to increase the

bandwidth.
10 Network bandwidth too narrow? Lower the start modem reception baud rate on
the receiving side.
IPFAX SW06

transmission.
12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper?

186
System Service Mode

SP1-XXX (Bit Switches)
"p.193 "Bit Switches""
1 Mode No. Function
System Switch
101 Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option
001 – 032 00 – 1F
( "p.193 "Bit Switches"")
Ifax Switch
102 Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax
001 – 016 00 – 0F option
Printer Switch
103 Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option
001 – 016 00 – 0F
Communication Switch
104 Change the bit switches for communication settings for the
001 – 032 00 – 1F fax option
G3-1 Switch
105 Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the
001 – 016 00 – 0F standard G3 board
IP fax Switch
111 Change the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters

001 – 016 00 – 0F
187
SP2-XXX (RAM)
2 Mode No. Function
RAM Read/Write
101
001 - Change RAM data for the fax board directly.
Memory Dump
102
001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board.
G3-1 NCU Parameters

103 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board.
001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22
( "p.245 "NCU Parameters"")
SP3-XXX (Machine Set)
3 Mode No. Function
Service Station
101
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
Serial Number
102
000 - Enter the fax unit’s serial number.
PSTN-1
Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If the
001 Select Line machine is installed on a PABX line, select “PABX”,
“PABX(GND)” or “PABX(FLASH)”.
103
PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the
002
Number G3-1 line.
Memory Lock If the customer does not want to receive transmissions

003
Disabled using Memory Lock on this line, turn this SP on.
188
System Service Mode
IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port -
002 SIP Port -
003 RAS Port -

107 004 Gatekeeper port -
005 T.38 Port -
006 SIP Server Port -
IPFAX Protocol
007 Select "H323" or "SIP".
Priority
FAX SW
201
001 – 032 00 – 1F -
SP4-XXX (ROM Version)
4 Mode No. Function
101 002 – 007 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 002 – 065 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 002 – 004 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
SP5-XXX (RAM Clear)
5 Mode No. Function
Initialization SRAM (Except secure)

101 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the
001
SRAM, files in the SAF memory, and clock.
Erase All Files

102
001 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
189
Reset Bit SW (Except secure)

103
001 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
Factory Setting
104 Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM
001
and files in the SAF memory.
Reset All Bit Switches

105
001 Initializes all the current bit switch settings.
Reset Secure Bit Switches
106 Initializes only the security bit switches. If you select automatic output/
001 display for the user parameter switches, the security settings are
initialized.
SP6-XXX (Report)
6 Mode No. Function
System Parameter List

101 Touch the “ON” button to print the system
001 -
parameter list.
Service Monitor Report

102 Touch the “ON” button to print the service monitor
001 -
report.
G3 Protocol Dump List
G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all communications

002
103 Communications) for the G3-1 line.
G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last

003
(1 Communication) communication for the G3-1 line.
190
System Service Mode
All Files Print out
Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory,

including confidential messages.
105
001 -
• Do not use this function, unless the customer is
having trouble printing confidential messages
or recovering files stored using the memory
lock feature.
Journal Print out
The machine prints all the communication records on

001 All Journals
106 the report.
The machine prints all communication records after

002 Specified Date
the specified date.
Log List Print out
001 All log files
002 Printer
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
107 These log print out functions are for designer use
007 Reconstruction
only.
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
191
IP Protocol Dump List
Prints the protocol dump list of all communications

001 All Communications
108 for the IP fax line.
Prints the protocol dump list of the last

002 1 Communication
communication for the IP fax line.
SP7-XXX (Tests)
These are the test modes for PTT approval.
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer
104 G3-1 V34 Tests (S2400baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
192
Bit Switches
Bit Switches
• Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”, as this may cause the
machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations. Such
bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
• Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List
printed by the machine.
System Switches
System Switch 00 [SP No. 1-101-001]
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated

Dedicated transmission parameter
transmission parameters.
0 programming
Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicated
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
transmission parameters.
1 Not used Do not change
Technical data printout on the

Journal 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data are
2
0: Disabled listed on the Journal for each G3 communication.
1: Enabled
193
e.g. 0000 (1) // 32 (2) V34 (3) // 288 (4) // 264 (5) // L0100 (6) 03 (7) 04 (8)
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx level (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
• EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.

• The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records and ECM
reception records.
Rx level calculation
Example: 0000 // 32 V34 // 288/264 // L 01 00 03 04
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to
get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
3 Not used Do not change this setting.
Line error mark print When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on the
4
0: OFF, 1: ON (print) printout if a line error occurs during reception.
G3/G4 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key
parameter display parameters (see below). This is normally disabled
5 because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.
Protocol dump list output after This is only used for communication troubleshooting. It
each communication shows the content of the transmitted facsimile protocol
6 signals. Always reset this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
0: Off
If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is only printed if
1: On there was an error during the communication.
194
Bit Switches
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
0-1 Not used Do not change these settings.
Forced reset after transmission stall With this setting on, the machine resets itself
2 0: Off automatically if a transmission stalls and fails to complete
1: On the job.
3 Not used Do not change these settings.
Permanent undeliverable file 0: Following “User SW 24 bit 1”

4
holding function 1: Permanent hold
Memory read/write by RDS

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0
(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out, but
Always disabled the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allow RDS
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 operations to take place. RDS will automatically be
locked out again after a certain time, which is stored in
6-7 User selectable
System Switch 03. Note that if an RDS operation takes
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 place, RDS will not switch off until this time limit has
User selectable expired.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 (1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access the
machine.
Always enabled
195
Length of time that RDS is 00 - 99 hours (BCD).

temporarily switched on when bits This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of System Switch
0-7
6 and 7 of System Switch 02 are 02 are set to “User selectable”.
set to “User selectable” The default setting is 24 hours.
Printing dedicated tx parameters 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is printed
on Quick/Speed Dial Lists with the dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes each).
3 The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed dedicated
0: Disabled
tx parameters; 34 bytes of data are printed (the other 24
1: Enabled bytes have no use for service technicians).
Confidential image option on the

result report Selects images Attached/Not attached on the
0
0: OFF accumulation/Tx result report for confidential Tx.
1: ON (Attached)
Condition selection for admin 0: Communications that reached phase C (message

communication report record tx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.
1 1: communications that reached phase A (call setup) of T.
0: After image data Tx
30 protocol are listed on the Journal. This will include
1: After call connection telephone calls.
196
Bit Switches
0: Error reports will not be printed.

Automatic error report printout
2 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
communications.
Printing of the error code on the

3 error report 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
0: No 1: Yes
1: A power failure report will be automatically printed

Power failure report after the power is switched on if a fax message
5
0: Disabled 1: Enabled disappeared from the memory when the power was
turned off last.
Conditions for printing the protocol

dump list This switch becomes effective only when system switch 00
bit 6 is set to 1.
6 0: Print for all communications
1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol dump
1: Print only when there is a list only for communications with errors.
communication error
Priority given to various types of

remote terminal ID when printing
reports This bit determines which set of priorities the machine uses
when listing remote terminal names on reports.
7 0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.
Number Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for the Quick/
Speed Dial number.
1: Dial label > Tel. number > RTI >
CSI
System Switch 0A [SP No. 1-101-011]
4 Dialing on the ten-key pad 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the
when the external telephone is external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when the
off-hook external telephone is not by the machine, or if a wireless
0: Disabled 1: Enabled telephone is connected as an external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key pad when
the handset is off-hook.
197
5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.

6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E [SP No. 1-101-015]
0-1 Not used Do not change the settings.
2 Not used This machine does not have the capture function.
Memory storing while the handset

used Enabled/Disabled selection Manual receive is disabled while this function is Enabled
3
(1).
[0: Disabled 1: Enabled]
System Switch 0F [SP No. 1-101-016]
198
Bit Switches
Country/area code for functional settings

(Hex)
00: France 11: USA
01: Germany 12: Asia
02: UK 13: Japan
03: Italy 14: Hong Kong
04: Austria 15: South Africa
05: Belgium 16: Australia This country/area code determines the factory
settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.
06: Denmark 17: New Zealand However, it has no effect on the NCU parameter
settings and communication parameter RAM
0-7 07: Finland 18: Singapore
addresses.
08: Ireland 19: Malaysia Cross reference
09: Norway 1A: China NCU country code:

SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan
0B: Switz. 1C: Korea
0C: Portugal 20: Turkey
0D: Holland 21: Greece
0E: Spain 22: Hungary
0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: --- 24: Poland
Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB

Threshold memory level for
0-7 N can be between 00 - FF(H)
parallel memory transmission
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB
199
TTI printing position

0: Superimposed on the page Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that
0 data the customer considers to be important (G3
1: Printed before the data leading transmissions).
edge
1-2 Not used Japan Only
TTI used for broadcasting

0: The TTIs selected for each 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
3 Quick/Speed dial are used destinations during broadcasting.
1: The same TTI is used for all *TTI= Transmit Terminal Identification
destinations
TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
Input even numbers only.
This setting determines the print start position for the TTI
TTI printing position in the main from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is moved too far
0-7
scan direction to the right, it may overwrite the file number which is on
the top right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is
moved over by more than 50 mm, it may overwrite the
page number.
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)
0 Not used Do not change the settings.
200
Bit Switches
Going into the Energy Saver mode

automatically 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode
1 quickly, because the +5V power supply is active even in
0: Enabled
the Energy Saver mode.
1: Disabled
Interval for preventing the machine

from entering Energy Saver mode
if there is a pending transmission
file.
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine does
1 min not go to Energy Saver mode during the selected period.
4-5 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
30 min1 mode.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0
1 hour
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1
24 hours
6-7 Not used Do not change
0 Parallel Broadcasting 1: The machine sends messages simultaneously using all

0: OFF available ports during broadcasting.
1: ON
201
Scanner page-memory
expansion (On DRAM added) Expands the 4MB page-memory to 12MB, to improve
6 scanning possible range.
0: Not expanding
This SW does not work without DRAM added.
1: Expanding
1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or

Special Original mode letterhead which has a colored or printed background,
7 0: OFF change this bit to “1”. “Original 1” and “Original 2” can
1: ON be selected in addition to the “Text”, “Text/Photo” and
“Photo” modes.
System Switch 1A [SP No. 1-101-027]
The received document is printed automatically after the

LS Rx Memory threshold value memory remaining amount becomes less than or equal to
setting this Switch’s value.
0-7 [00 – FF: HEX Changing hex-value to decimal and then multiplying the
(0 – 1020 k Byte)] value by 4, suggests xxx K byte.
Default: 0x80(512k Byte) [i.e.: 80 changes to 128 in hex to decimal conversion.
128x4= 512K Byte]
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D [SP No. 1-101-030]
RTI/CSI/CPS code display 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the
0 0: Enable LCD panel during communication.
1: Disable 1: Codes are switched off (no display)
System Switch 1E [SP No. 1-101-031]
202
Bit Switches
0: When this switch is on and the journal history becomes

full, the next report prints. If the journal history is not
deleted, the next transmission cannot be received. This
prevents overwriting communication records before the
Communication after the Journal machine can print them.
data storage area has become full 1: If the buffer memory of the communication records for
0
0: Impossible the Journal is full, fax communications are still possible.
1: Possible But the machine will overwrite the oldest communication
records.
Note: This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal
printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the report
(e.g., no paper).
0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the

Action when the SAF memory has
successfully scanned pages are transmitted.
become full during scanning
1 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning, the
0: The current page is erased.
file is erased and no pages are transmitted.
1: The entire file is erased.
This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory transmission.
RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is
2 displayed on the LCD while the machine is
0: RTI 1: CSI communicating in G3 non-standard mode.
File No. printing

3 0: Enabled 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
1: Disabled
If authorized reception is enabled but the user has stored

Action when authorized reception no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, the machine will not
is enabled but authorized RTIs/ be able to receive any fax messages.
CSIs are not yet programmed If the customer wishes to receive messages from any
4
0: All fax reception is disabled sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block messages
1: Faxes can be received if the from senders that do not include an RTI or CSI, change
sender has an RTI or CSI this bit to “1”, then enable Authorized Reception.
Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.
5-7 Not used Do not change the settings
System Switch 1F [SP No. 1-101-032]
203
0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory overflows

Report printout after an original during scanning, a report will be printed.
jam during SAF storage or if the
SAF memory fills up Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not want to
1 have a report in these cases.
0: Enabled
Memory tx – Memory storage report
1: Disabled
Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report
Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after the
(G3 reception) machine receives it.
3
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after the
1: After receiving all pages machine receives all the pages in the memory.
0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than

SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically resets
Action when a fax SC has itself.
occurred
7 1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the fax unit
0: Automatic reset stops.
1: Fax unit stops Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”
I-Fax Switches
I-fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-102-001]
FUNCTION COMMENTS
No These settings set the size applying to adjusting the

Original size limitation of TX
transmitted original data so that the destination can
Attachment File
receive within its capacity.
204
Bit Switches
0 A4
1 B4
2 A3 0: Not selected
1: Selected
3 Reserved (B4)
This function can keep a transmitting operation from a
4 Reserved (A2) destination’s incapacity error for the size limitation.
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
FUNCTION COMMENTS
No Original Line Resolution of TX These settings set the maximum resolution of the original
Attachment File that the destination can receive.
0 200x100 Standard
1 200x200 Detail
0: Not selected
2 200x400 Fine 1: Selected
3 300 x 300 Reserve If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the
higher resolution has priority. For example, if both Bit 0
4 400 x 400 Super Fine and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the resolution is set for "Bit 2
200 x 400.
5 600 x 600 Reserve
6 Reserve
205
mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail. There is no
switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine the
setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch selection is determined by the
sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
7
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
Images received in mm are converted to inches.
RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails when they
are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
0 1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and “Subject” address
are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this setting is ignored
and no header is printed.
206
Bit Switches
Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail attachment are
printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows the customer to see
1 which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail
addresses, for example.
0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the transmission
was received normally at the destination.
00: “Dispatched”
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
“dispatched” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.
01: “Displayed”
2-3
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
“displayed” in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to “00” (for
“dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any setting other
than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the setting to “01” to enable normal sending
of the Return Receipt.
Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to confirm a
reception.
4 0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail, which
contains the media accept feature field.
207
5-6 Not Used
Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
7 0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order to have enough SAF
(Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change the settings) [ SP No. 1-102-004]
Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI of the
originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI or CSI is
0 used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the Subject line
that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine automatically the
destination folder for each e-mail.
Subject corresponding to mail post database
0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three cases:
1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
1
2) When memory sending, delivery specified by F code or SMTP reception is done.
3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).
• This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for memory
sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when operators are using FOL
(to prevent problems when receiving transmissions).
208
Bit Switches
2-7 Not Used
0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions
broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9
destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1 I-Fax Automatic Re-dial Setting Determines whether the I-fax automatically redials
0: OFF when an error occurs.
1: ON
2-7 Not used
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-007]
I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-008]
Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores fax
messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds incoming
messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory available falls below
0-7 this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
• The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of

memory.
209
This setting determines the number of retries when

4-7 Restrict TX Retries connection and transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-011]
I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-012]
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-013]
I-fax Switch 0D [SP No. 1-102-014]
0-1 Not used
2-3 Signature on Transmitting for Result Notification - Individual Settings
Bit SW(3,2)
(0,0): Not attached
(0,1): Setting forbidden
(0,1): Individual settings (Initial Setting)
(0,1): Attached at all times
Signature settings on result notification mail.

This function applies to the following notification mail:
• Transmitting result notification mail
• Folder transfer result notification mail
• Receiving result notification mail
• Memory-near-full notification mail
• Job-near-full notification mail
• Memory-full notification mail
• Job-full notification mail
210
Bit Switches
4-5 Signature for Transmitted mail - Individual Settings
Bit SW(5,4)
(0,0): Not attached
(0,1): Setting forbidden
(0,1): Individual settings (Initial Setting)
(0,1): Attached at all times
6-7 Not used
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-102-015]
I-fax Switch 0F [SP No. 1-102-016]
Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output
0 immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
Signature setting for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether the signature is attached or not on files received with SMTP
1 protocol.
0: Off.
1: On.
Encryption Setting for SMTP RX Files
Selects the encryption for SMTP RX files ON/OFF when the address encryption setting is
2 “Individual Setting”.
0: OFF.
1: ON.
3-7 Not used
211
Printer Switches
Printer Switch 00 [SP No. 1-103-001]
0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed in the

bottom right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is
printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two pages, for
example, [*] [2] is printed in the bottom right corner of
Select page separation marks
the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper right
0 0: Off corner of the 2nd page.
1: On
• This helps the user to identify pages that have been

split because the size of the paper is smaller than the
size of the document received. (When A5 is used to
print an A4 size document, for example.)
Repetition of data when the

received page is longer than the 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previous
printer paper page are repeated at the top of the next page.
1
0: Off 0: The next page continues from where the previous page
stopped without any repeated text.
1: On
Prints the date and time on This switch is only effective when user parameter 02 - bit
received fax messages 2 (printing the received date and time on received fax
2 messages) is enabled.
0: Disabled
1: The machine prints the received and printed date and
1: Enabled time at the bottom of each received page.
Printer Switch 01 - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-002]
212
Bit Switches
1st paper feed station usage for

fax printing
0
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2nd paper feed station usage for

fax printing
1 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax
0: Enabled
messages and reports.
1: Disabled
1: The specified paper feed station will not be used for
3rd paper feed station usage for printing fax messages and reports.
fax printing
2
0: Enabled
• Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which
1: Disabled has been specified by User Parameter Switch 0F
(15), or which is used for the Specified Cassette
4th paper feed station usage for
Selection feature.
fax printing
3
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Selects LCT use Enabled/Disabled

4 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
0: Incoming pages are printed without length reduction.

Length reduction of received data (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4 to 7)
0 0: Disabled 1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
1: Enabled (Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04, bits 0 to
4)
213
Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with

switch 03-0 above).
Page separation setting when sub For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is the
scan compression is forbidden selected paper size:
4-7
00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) If the received document is 10 mm or less longer than A4,
Default: 6 mm then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints.
If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4, then
the document is split into 2 pages.
Printer Switch 04 SP No. 1-103-005
Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + (N x 5mm)
“N” is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0-4
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper

<Maximum reducible length> = <Paper length> + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken place.
Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = 4 mm
5-6 Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = 10 mm
Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = 15 mm
Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Not used
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)
214
Bit Switches
Printing while a paper cassette is

pulled out, when the Just Size
Printing feature is enabled.
0: Printing will not start Cross reference
0
1: Printing will start if another Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5
cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size
selection priority tables.
1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.
List of destinations in the

Communication Failure Report for
broadcasting 1: Only destinations where communication failure
4 0: All destinations occurred are printed on the Communication Failure
Report.
1: Only destinations where
communication failure occurred
Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-011]
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-012]
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-013]
Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) [SP No. 1-103-014]
Printer Switch 0E [SP No. 1-103-015]
215
0: A paper size that has the same width as the

Paper size selection priority received data is selected first.
0 0: Width 1: A paper size which has enough length to print
1: Length all the received lines without reduction is selected
first.
Paper size selected for printing A4

width fax data This switch determines which paper size is selected
1 for printing A4 width fax data, when the machine
0: 8.5" x 11" size
has both A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page

Page separation separation to print a received fax message, the
machine does not print the message (Substitute
2 0: Enabled Reception is used).
1: Disabled After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the
machine automatically prints the fax message.
Printing the sample image on reports “Same size” means the sample image is printed at
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 0 = The upper half only 100%, even if page separation occurs.
Bit 4: 0, Bit 3: 1 = 50% reduction in sub- User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set
3-4
scan only to “0” to enable this switch.
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 0 = Same size Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on
Bit 4: 1, Bit 3: 1 = Not used this feature.
Equalizing the reduction ratio among 0: When page separation has taken place, all the
separated pages pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.
7 (Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected
0: Enabled paper size when page separation has taken
1: Disabled place. Other pages are printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F [SP No. 1-103-016]
216
Bit Switches
Smoothing feature
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = Disabled (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine receives
0-1 Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = Disabled halftone images from other manufacturers fax machines
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = Enabled frequently.
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 = Not used
This function is available only when the Duplex unit is

Duplex-Print Setting
2 equipped.
0: Disabled / 1: Enabled
This SW is disabled on Report/List-Output.
Stapling area setting for Duplex- 0: Left side area stapled

3
Print 1: Upper side area stapled
Communication Switches
Communication Switch 00 [SP No. 1-104-001]
Compression modes available in

receive mode
Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 0 = MH only
These bits determine the compression capabilities to be
0-1 Bit 1: 0 Bit 0: 1 = MH/MR
declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 0 = MH/MR/MMR
Bit 1: 1 Bit 0: 1 =
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG

transmit mode
Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 0 = MH only These bits determine the compression capabilities to be
2-3 Bit 3: 0 Bit 2: 1 = MH/MR used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B
Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 0 = MH/MR/MMR (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Bit 3: 1 Bit 2: 1 =
MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
217
JBIG compression method:

Reception
Change the setting when communication problems occur
5 0: Only basic supported
using JBIG compression.
1: Basic and optional both
supported
JBIG compression method:

Transmission Change the setting when communication problems occur
6
0: Basic mode priority using JBIG compression.
1: Optional mode priority
Closed User Group (CUG)

connecting ON/OFF switch (for 0: All Fax received
7 RX)
1: Fax only from a sender machine that has the same
0: OFF polling ID as the receiver, can be received.
1: ON
If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all

ECM communications.
0
0: Off 1: On In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are
switched off automatically.
00: OFF
The trigger selection for the G3 01: All CSI digits un-corresponded
2-3
misconnecting protection 10: The last 4 CSI digits un-corresponded
11: CSI and RTI absence
4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.
218
Bit Switches
Maximum printable page length

available
Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 0 = No limit The setting determined by these bits is informed to the
6-7 transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol
Bit 7: 0 Bit 6: 1 = B4 (364 mm)
exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 0 = A4 (297 mm)
Bit 7: 1 Bit 6: 1 = Not used
If there are more consecutive error lines in the received

page than the threshold, the machine will send a negative
response. The Low and High threshold values depend on
the sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
G3 Burst error threshold
0 100 dpi 6(L) 12(H)
0: Low 1: High
200 dpi 12(L) 24(H)
300 dpi 18(L) 36(H)
400 dpi 24(L) 48(H)
Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable
1
0: 5% 1: 10% ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.
Treatment of pages received with

errors during G3 reception
2 0: Deleted from memory without 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
printing
1: Printed
0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is

Hang-up decision when a received.
negative code (RTN or PIN) is
received during G3 immediate 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives
3
transmission RTN or PIN.
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is

being used.
219
Maximum number of page 00 - FF (Hex) times.

0-7 retransmissions in a G3 memory This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.
transmission Default setting - 03(H)
Remote switch setting for TEL mode Determines whether remote switching is ON/OFF on
0
0: OFF 1: ON receiving fax transmission, in TEL mode.
Remote switch setting for FAX

mode Determines whether remote switching is ON/OFF on
1
auto receiving, in FAX mode.
0: OFF 1: ON
Remote switch setting for AUTO

mode Determines whether remote switching is ON/OFF on
2
auto receiving, in AUTO mode.
0: OFF 1: ON
00-09 (0-9: HEX)

Number setting for remote
0-3 Selects the handset number pushed to switch between
switching
TEL/FAX.
Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)
220
Bit Switches
Adjusts the interval of the IP-fax dialing.

The interval of IP-fax dialing is calculated by following
0-7 IP-Fax dial interval setting
formula.
[Interval time = specified value with this switch x 2 sec]
Communication Switch 0A [SP No. 1-104-011]
Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
0
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using normal
1: From page 1 memory transmission.
Communication Switch 0B [SP No. 1-104-012]
0-3 Not used (do not change the settings)
Received file output ON/OFF

selection for multiple relayed Determines whether received file(s) is printed out or not
4 communications. by the relaying copier on multiple relayed
communications.
0: OFF 1: ON
Communication Switch 0C – Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0D [SP No. 1-104-014]
221
00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes

(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
One page is about 24 kbytes.
The available memory threshold, The machine refers to this setting before each fax
below which ringing detection reception. If the amount of remaining memory is below
0-7 this threshold, the machine cannot receive any fax
(and therefore reception into
memory) is disabled messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect ringing
signals and go into receive mode even if there is no
memory available. This will result in communication
failure.
Communication Switch 0E [SP No. 1-104-015]
06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
Minimum interval between (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
0-7
automatic dialing attempts This value is the minimum time that the machine waits
before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)
Memory transmission: Maximum

0-7 number of dialing attempts to the 01 – FE (Hex) times
same destination
Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)
Memory transmission: Interval

0-7 between dialing attempts to the 01 – FF (Hex) minutes
same destination
222
Bit Switches
Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)
0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format

are transmitted without conversion.
In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in
Inch-to-mm conversion during mm format are transmitted without conversion.
0 transmission Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF memory,
0: Disabled 1: Enabled the fax unit always converts the data into mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored data
in the SAF memory to the format which was specified in
the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) before transmission.
Available unit of resolution in

which fax messages are received
For the best performance, do not change the factory
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = mm settings.
6-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = inch The setting determined by these bits is informed to the
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = mm and inch transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol
(default) exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).
Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 16 – Not used (do not change the settings)
SEP (Selective polling) reception

Enabled/Disabled switch “Enabled” means SEP (Selective polling) is acceptable on
0
reception.
223
SUB (password-locked data)

reception Enabled/Disabled “Enabled” means SUB confidential transmission is
1 switch acceptable on reception.
PWD (password) reception

Enabled/Disabled switch “Enabled” means PWD (password for SEP) is acceptable
2
on reception.
Determines whether PSTN dial-in routine function by

PSTN dial-in routine Enabled/
which reception information is transferred to some
5 Disabled switch
destinations, enabled/disabled.
PSTN dial-in number is 4 digits.
Operating selection on not

corresponding F-codebox with
7 received SUB This function also applies to SID/PWD only reception.
0: Disconnect
1: Receive
Determines whether IP-FAX dial-in routine function which

IP-FAX dial-in routine function
has the same function as PSTN dial-in routine does on IP-
5 Enabled/Disabled switch
FAX, enable/disable.
0: Disable / 1: Enable
Default is 0 (Disable).
Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B [SP No. 1-104-028]
224
Bit Switches
If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol

Extension access code (0 to 7) to procedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.
turn V.8 protocol On/Off
0-7 Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1.
0: On When the machine detects “0” as the first dialed number,
1: Off it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (Alternatively, if
“3” is the PSTN access code, set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C [SP No. 1-104-029]
Refer to communication switch 1B.

Extension access code (8 and 9)
to turn V.8 protocol On/Off Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1.
0-1 0: On When the machine detects “8” as the first dialed number,
it automatically disables V.8 protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN
1: Off
access code, use bit 1.)
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3-1 Switches
G3 Switch 00 [SP No. 1-105-001]
Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the
communication (tx and rx) communication.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Disabled (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T.
0-1 30 protocol.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Up to Phase B
(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = All the time
through the communication. Make sure that you reset
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Reserved these bits after testing.
225
Monitor speaker during memory

transmission 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
2
transmission.
Private G3 FAX line enabled/ This function is used in the situation that one fax is
6 disabled switch connected to the other directly without switching
0: Disabled / 1:Enabled equipment.
G3 Switch 01 [SP No. 1-105-002]
1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be
DIS frame length limitation transmitted (set to 1 if there are communication problems
4
0: OFF 1: 4 bytes with PC-based faxes which cannot receive the extended
DIS frames).
Forbid CED/AMsam output Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless
6 0: Off communication problem is caused by a CED or ANSam
1: On (Forbid output) transmission.
G3 Switch 02 [SP No. 1-105-003]
Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only
G3 protocol mode used communicate with machines that send T.30-standard
0 0: Standard and non-standard frames only.
1: Standard only 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in non-
standard mode communication)
226
Bit Switches
Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for

7
0: Disabled 1: Enabled details about Short Preamble.
G3 Switch 03 [SP No. 1-105-004]
DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS
(Echo countermeasure) frame twice.
0
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the
1: 2 second DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1 Not Used Do not change the settings.
0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

V.8 protocol Note:
2 0: Disabled Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is always bad
1: Enabled enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbps or
lower.
ECM frame size

3 0: 256 bytes Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.
1: 64 bytes
0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode,

the machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate
after receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in
communications at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
CTC transmission conditions

0: After one PPR signal received
4 NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames
1: After four PPR signals received
(ITU-T standard) NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop
back the modem rate after receiving four PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
227
Modem rate used for the next

page after receiving a negative 1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back before
5 code (RTN or PIN) sending the next page if a negative code is received. This
bit is ignored if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 Not Used Do not change the settings
This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on

Select detection of reverse polarity
the phone line (applied to PSTN-G3 ringing). Do not
in ringing
7 change this setting
0: Off
0: No detection Outside Japan
1: On
1: Detection Inside Japan only
G3 Switch 04 [SP No. 1-105-005]
0-3 Training error detection threshold 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits

If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this
threshold, the machine informs the sender that training
has succeeded.
G3 Switch 05 [SP No. 1-105-006]
228
Bit Switches
Initial Tx modem rate
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps
0 0 0 1 2.4k
0 0 1 0 4.8k
0 0 1 1 7.2k
0 1 0 0 9.6k
These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
0 1 0 1 12.0k transmission.
0 1 1 0 14.4k Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need
to change this for specific receivers.
0-3 0 1 1 1 16.8k
If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
1 0 0 0 19.2k protocol should be disabled manually.
Cross reference
1 0 0 1 21.6k
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
1 0 1 0 24.0k
1 0 1 1 26.4k
1 1 0 0 28.8k
1 1 0 1 31.2k
1 1 1 0 33.6k
Other settings - Not used
Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2

kbps.
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V.29 These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2
4-5
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V.17 kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = V.34
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = Reserved
G3 Switch 06 [SP No. 1-105-007]
229
Initial Rx modem rate
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 bps
0 0 0 1 2.4k
0 0 1 0 4.8k
0 0 1 1 7.2k
0 1 0 0 9.6k
• These bits set the initial starting modem rate
0 1 0 1 12.0k for reception.
• Use a lower setting if high speeds pose
0 1 1 0 14.4k
problems during reception.
0-3 0 1 1 1 16.8k • If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is
selected, V.8 protocol should be disabled
1 0 0 0 19.2k manually.
1 0 0 1 21.6k Cross reference:
1 0 1 0 24.0k
1 0 1 1 26.4k
1 1 0 0 28.8k
1 1 0 1 31.2k
1 1 1 0 33.6k
230
Bit Switches
Modem types available for reception
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
V.27ter, V. • The setting of these bits is used to inform the

0 0 1 0
29 transmitting terminal of the available modem
type for the machine in receive mode.
V.27ter, V.
4-7 0 0 1 1 • If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be
29
disabled manually.
V.27ter, V. Cross reference:
0 1 0 0
29, V.17
V.27ter, V.
0 1 0 1 29, V.17,
V.34
G3 Switch 07 [SP No. 1-105-008]
Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher

frequencies because of the length of wire
between the modem and the telephone
exchange.
PSTN cable equalizer
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
(tx mode: Internal) specific receivers.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = None Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
0-1
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Low of the following symptoms occurs.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Medium Communication error
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = High Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
• This setting is not effective in V.34

communications.
231

PSTN cable equalizer exchange.
(rx mode: Internal) Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
of the following symptoms occurs.
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = None
2-3 Communication error with error codes such as
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Low
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Medium
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = High

communicatio
PSTN cable equalizer

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
4 Keep this bit at “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial

Parameter selection for dial tone detection tone detection.
6 0: Normal parameter 1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with

SRAM (69ECBEH - 69ECDEH). Select this if the
1: Specific parameter dial tone cannot be detected when the "Normal
parameter: 0" is selected.
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 09 [SP No. 1-105-008]
232
Bit Switches

exchange.
ISDN cable equalizer
Use the dedicated transmission parameters for
(tx mode: Internal) specific receivers.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = None Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
0-1
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Low of the following symptoms occurs.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Medium Communication error
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = High Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

communications.

ISDN cable equalizer exchange.
(rx mode: Internal) Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more
of the following symptoms occurs.
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = None
2-3 Communication error with error codes such as
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Low
0-20, 0-23, etc.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Medium
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = High

communications.
ISDN cable equalizer

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)
4 Keep this bit at “1”.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
G3 Switch 0A [SP No. 1-105-011]
233
Maximum allowable carrier drop

during image data reception (ms)
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time.
0-1
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 400 Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 800
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Reserved
Select cancellation of high-speed

RX if carrier signal lost while This switch setting determines if high-speed receiving
2 receiving ends if the carrier signal is lost when receiving during
0: Off non-ECM mode
1: On
3 Not used Do not change the settings
This bit set the maximum interval between EOL (end-of-

Maximum allowable frame interval
line) signals and the maximum interval between ECM
4 during image data reception.
frames from the other end.
0: 5 sec 1: 13 sec
Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent.
When the sending terminal is controlled by a

computer, there may be a delay in receiving page
data after the local machine accepts set-up data and
Reconstruction time for the first line sends CFR. This is outside the T.30 recommendation.
6 in receive mode But, if this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give the
sending machine more time to send data.
0: 6 sec 1: 12 sec
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should come
within 5 s of CFR.
G3 Switch 0B Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0C [SP No. 1-105-013]
234
Bit Switches
DTMF/DP fixed detection method selection for remote

switching
• Bit4: 0 / Bit5: 0 = Simultaneous detection of
DTMF+PSTN external line choice Sets the signal from the handset as
4-5
a trigger for remote switching
• Bit4: 0 / Bit5: 1 = DTMF fixed
• Bit4: 1 / Bit5: 0 = DP (10PPS) fixed
• Bit4: 1 / Bit5: 1 = DP(20PPS) fixed
G3 Switch 0D Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E [SP No 1-105-015]
Set CNG send time interval

Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3-second
CNG interval.
0-7 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms

High order bit
3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) < N < FF (2250 ms)
00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
Low order bit
3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) < N < 0F (3700 ms)
G3 Switch 0F [SP No. 1-105-016]
Alarm when an error occurred in

Phase C or later If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error
0
0: Disabled communication, change this bit to “1”.
1: Enabled
Alarm when the handset is off-

hook at the end of communication If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is
1 off-hook at the end of fax communication, change this bit
0: Disabled
to “1”.
1: Enabled
235
Sidaa manual calibration setting

1: manually calibrates for communication with a line,
4 0: Off
whose current change occurs such as an optical fiber line.
1: On
IP Fax Switches
IP Fax Switch 00 [SP No. 1-111-001]
No. FUNCTION COMMENTS
IP Fax Transport
1 Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
0: TCP, 1: UDP
IP Fax single port selection

2 Selects single data port.
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax double ports (single data port)

3 selection Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)
IP Fax Gatekeeper Enables/disables the communication via the

4
0: OFF, 1: ON (enable) gatekeeper for IP-Fax.
IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse

5 Reverses the T30 bit signal.
0: LSB first, 1: MSB first
When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does not

IP Fax max bit rate setting affect the value of the DIS/DCS.
6
0: Not affected, 1: Affected When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects the
value of the DIS/DCS.
236
Bit Switches
When "0" is selected, fax data is received without

IP Fax received telephone number checking the telephone number.
confirmation When "1" is selected, fax data is received only
7 when confirming that the telephone number from
0: No confirmation,
the sender matches the registered telephone
1: Confirmation number in this machine. If this confirmation fails, the
line is disconnected.
IP-Fax Switch 01
Select IP FAX Delay Level Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too
many transmission errors are occurring on the
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 Setting network.
0 0 0 0 Level 0 If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise this
setting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delay
0-3 0 0 0 1 Level 1 time allows the recovery of more lost packets.
0 0 1 0 Level 2 If only UDP is enabled, increase the number of
redundant packets.
0 0 1 1 Level 3
Level 1 to 2: 3 Redundant packets
Level 3: 4 Redundant packets
Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0F]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch
4-7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0F (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).
237
When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse method

is decided by the maker code.
IP Fax bit signal reverse setting
When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse method
0 0: Maker code setting
is decided by the internal bit switch.
1: Internal bit switch setting
(When communicating between IP Fax devices,
LSB first is selected.)
IP Fax transmission speed setting

Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax
1 0: Modem speed
communication.
1: No limitation
SIP transport setting This bit switch sets the transport that has priority for
receiving IP Fax data.
2 0: TCP
This function is activated only when the sender has
1: UDP both TCP and UDP.
CCM connection When "1" is selected, only the connection call

3 0: No CCM connection message with H.323 or no tunneled H.245 is
1: CCM connection transmitted via CCM.
Message reception selection from non- 0: This answers the INVITE message from the SIP
registered SIP server server not registered for the machine.
4 1: This does not receive the INVITE message from
0: Answer
the SIP server not registered for the machine and
1: Not answer send a refusal message.
0: This does not limit the type of the image

ECM communication setting compression with ECM communication.
5 0: No limit for image compression 1: When the other end machine is Ciscco, this
1: Limit for image compression permits the image compression other than JBIG or
MMR with ECM communication.
Effective field limitation for G3 standard

function information Limits the effective field for standard G3 function
0
information.
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
238
Bit Switches
Switching between G3 standard and

G3 non standard Enables/disables switching between G3 standard
1
0: Enable switching and G3 non-standard.
1: G3 standard only
2 Not used. Do not change this setting.
ECM frame size selection at

3 transmitting Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
DIS detection times for echo prevention

4 Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes.
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
CTC transmission selection When "0" is selected, the transmission condition is

decided by error frame numbers.
5 0: PPRx1
When "1" is selected, the transmission condition is
1: PPRx4 based on the ITU-T method.
Shift down setting at receiving negative

code Selects whether to shift down when negative codes
6
are received.
0: OFF, 1: ON
Sets the TCF error threshold level.

0-3 TCF error threshold [00 to 0F]
The default is "1111" (0F H).
239
Modem bit rate setting for transmission

Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 1 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps
0-3 0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps
0 1 1 1 Not Used
1 0 0 0 Not Used
1 0 0 1 Not Used
1 0 1 0 Not Used
1 0 1 1 Not Used
1 1 0 0 Not Used
1 1 0 1 Not Used
1 1 1 0 Not Used
Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.
The default is "00" (V29).
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = V29
4-5
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = V17
*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.
240
Bit Switches
Modem bit rate setting for reception

Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
0 0 0 1 2400 bps
0 0 1 0 4800 bps
0 0 1 1 7200 bps
0 1 0 0 9600 bps
0 1 0 1 12.0 Kbps
0 1 1 0 14.4 Kbps
0-3
0 1 1 1 Not Used
1 0 0 0 Not Used
1 0 0 1 Not Used
1 0 1 0 Not Used
1 0 1 1 Not Used
1 1 0 0 Not Used
1 1 0 1 Not Used
1 1 1 0 Not Used
241
Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
0 0 0 1 V27ter
0 0 1 0 V27ter, V29
4-7
V27ter, V29, V33
0 0 1 1
(invalid)
0 1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V17
0 1 0 1 Not Used
*V34 is not supported for IP-Fax communication.
TSI information
0 Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS(S).
0: Not added, 1: Added
DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout

1 0: Not transmitted, Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout.
1: Transmitted
Hang up setting at DIS reception

disabled Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS
3
0: No hang up reception.
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done at the
4
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times same bit rate.
Space CSI transmission setting at no

CSI registration When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
5 When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is all
0: Not transmitted,
spaces.
1: Transmitted
242
Bit Switches
T1 timer adjustment
Adjusts the T1 timer.
The default is "00" (35 seconds).
0-1 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 35 sec -
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 40 sec
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 50 sec
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 60 sec
T4 timer adjustment
Adjust the T4 timer.
The default is "00" (3 seconds).
2-3 Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 3 sec -
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 3.5 sec
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = 4 sec
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 = 5 sec
T0 timer adjustment Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval
Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 0 = 75 sec between "setup" data transmission and T.38 phase
decision. If your destination return is late on the
4-5 Bit 5: 0, Bit 4: 1 = 120 sec network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the longer
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 0 = 180 sec interval timer.
Bit 5: 1, Bit 4: 1 = 240 sec The default is "00" (75 seconds).
Setting IPv4 or IPv6 for SIP call

connection This function is used to make SIP connection suited
0
0: IPv4 (Default) to the user network environment.
1: IPv6
243
Setting the way to choose the method

with which FAX data communication is
done Sets selection way of network I/F method
1 Automatic setting (1) means negotiating with call
0: The same method as the call
connection connection before determining IPv4 or IPv6.
1: Automatic setting
Record-route using
“Enabled” is for Record-route acceptable SIP
2 1: Enabled
server
2: Disabled
Delay time between ACK-message

reception and re-INVITE transmitting
Bit 3 Bit 4
Set this function more than “1 sec” when SIP
3-4 0 0 No delay connection is done via HiPath8000/4000
1 0 1 sec (Siemen Co.)
0 1 2 sec
1 1 3 sec
IP Fax Switch 0A Not Used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0B Not Used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0C Not Used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0D Not Used (do not change the settings)
244
NCU Parameters
NCU Parameters
• The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine
uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are
also given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-101), but some can be
changed using NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103); if SP2-103 can be used, this will be
indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in
the Unit column.
245
Address Function
Country/Area code for NCU parameters
Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, or use
the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001
Country Decimal Hex Country Decimal Hex

/Area /Area
France 00 00 USA 17 11
Germany 01 01 Asia 18 12
UK 02 02 Japan 19 13
Hong Kong 20 14
Italy 03 03 South 21 15
Africa
Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16
Belgium 05 05 New 23 17
680500
Zealand
Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18
Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19
Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A
Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B
Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C
Switzerland 11 0B Brazil 29 1D
Turkey 32 20
Portugal 12 0C Greece 33 21
Holland 13 0D Hungary 34 22
Spain 14 0E Czech 35 23
Israel 15 0F Poland 36 24
246
NCU Parameters
Address Function Unit Remarks
680501 Line current detection time Line current detection is

disabled.
680502 Line current wait time 20 ms
Line current is not detected if
680503 Line current drop detect time 680501 contains FF.
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit

680504 If both addresses contain
(high byte)
Hz (BCD) FF(H), tone detection is
PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
680505
(low byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit

(high byte)
PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit disabled.
680507
(low byte)
680508 PSTN dial tone detection time

If 680508 contains FF(H),
680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)
the machine pauses for the
68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH) pause time (address
68050D / 68050E).
68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time 20 ms
Italy: See Note 2.
68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time
68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)

-
68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)
Detection is disabled if this

68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms
contains FF.
680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detection time 20 ms -
PSTN detection time for silent period

680511 20 ms -
after ring-back tone detected (LOW)
PSTN detection time for silent period

680512 20 ms -
after ring-back tone detected (HIGH)
247
PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit

(high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency upper limit disabled.
680514
(low byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit

(high byte)
PSTN busy tone frequency lower limit disabled.
680516
(low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit

(high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency upper limit disabled.
680518
(low byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit

(high byte)
PABX dial tone frequency lower limit disabled.
68051A
(low byte)
68051B PABX dial tone detection time
68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW) If 68051B contains FF, the
machine pauses for the
68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)
pause time (680520 /
68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time 20 ms 680521).
68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time
680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)

-
680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)
680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms If both addresses contain

FF(H), tone detection is
680523 PABX ringback tone off detection time 20 ms disabled.
248
NCU Parameters
PABX detection time for silent period

680524 20 ms If both addresses contain
after ringback tone detected (LOW)
PABX detection time for silent period disabled.
680525 20 ms
after ringback tone detected (HIGH)
PABX busy tone frequency upper limit

(high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency upper limit disabled.
680527
(low byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower limit

(high byte)
PABX busy tone frequency lower limit disabled.
680529
(low byte)
68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1
68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1
68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2 20 ms
68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2
68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3

-
68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3
680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4
680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4 20 ms
Busy tone continuous tone detection

680532
time
249
Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cycles required for
detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be
detected twice).
Tolerance (±)
680533 Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 50% Bits 2 and 3 must always be kept at 0.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 25%
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 12.5%
Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection
International dial tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)
International dial tone frequency upper disabled.
680535
limit (low byte)
International dial tone frequency lower

limit (high byte)
International dial tone frequency lower disabled.
680537
limit (low byte)
680538 International dial tone detection time
680539 International dial tone reset time (LOW)

If 680538 contains FF, the
International dial tone reset time machine pauses for the
68053A
(HIGH) pause time (68053D /
International dial tone continuous tone 68053E).
68053B 20 ms
time Belgium: See Note 2.
International dial tone permissible drop

68053C
time
68053D International dial wait interval (LOW)

-
68053E International dial wait interval (HIGH)
250
NCU Parameters
Country dial tone upper frequency limit

68053F If both addresses contain
(HIGH)
Country dial tone upper frequency limit disabled.
680540
(LOW)
Hz (BCD)
Country dial tone lower frequency limit
(HIGH)
Country dial tone lower frequency limit disabled.
680542
(LOW)
680543 Country dial tone detection time If 680543 contains FF, the
machine pauses for the
680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW) 20 ms
pause time (680548 /
680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH) 680549).
680546 Country dial tone continuous tone time - -
680547 Country dial tone permissible drop time
680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW) 20 ms -
680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

Time between opening or closing the
68054A 1 ms SP2-103-012 (parameter
DO relay and opening the OHDI relay
11).
See Note 3.
68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-013 (parameter
12).
See Note 3.
68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms SP2-103-014 (parameter
13).
See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

SP2-103-015 (parameter
Time between final OHDI relay closure
68054D 1 ms 14).
and DO relay opening or closing
This parameter is only valid
in Europe.
251
See Note 3 and 8.

Minimum pause between dialed digits
68054E SP2-103-016 (parameter
(pulse dial mode)
20 ms 15).
Time waited when a pause is entered SP2-103-017 (parameter

68054F
at the operation panel 16). See Note 3.
680550 DTMF tone on time
17).
1 ms
680551 DTMF tone off time
18).
Tone attenuation level of DTMF signals -N x 0.5 –3.5 19).
680552
while dialing dBm
See Note 5.
20).
Tone attenuation value difference The setting must be less than
680553 between high frequency tone and low -dBm x 0.5 –5dBm, and should not
frequency tone in DTMF signals exceed the setting at
680552h above.
See Note 5.
PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5 –3.5 SP2-103-022 (parameter

680554
after dialling dBm 21). See Note 5.
ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level

680555 -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5
after dialling
680556 Not used - Do not change the settings.
Time between 68054Dh (NCU This parameter takes effect

680557 parameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCU 1 ms when the country code is set
parameter 15) to France.
680558 Not used - Do not change the setting.
The Gs relay is closed for

680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms
this interval.
The OHDI relay is open for

68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms
this interval.
252
NCU Parameters
68055B International dial access code (High) For a code of 100:

BCD 68055B - F1
68055C International dial access code (Low)
68055C - 00
This time is waited for each

pause input after the PSTN
access code. If this address
contains FF[H], the pause
68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms time stored in address
68054F is used.
Do not set a number more
than 7 in the UK.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -25.0 dBm

Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = -35.0 dBm
Progress tone detection level, and Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -30.0 dBm
68055E
cadence detection enable flags Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = -40.0 dBm
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = -49.0 dBm
Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.
68055F
To Not used - Do not change the settings.
680564
680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD For a code of 0:

680565 – FF
680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD
680566 - FF
680567
to Not used - Do not change the settings.
680571
253
Acceptable ringing signal frequency: SP2-103-003 (parameter

680572
range 1, upper limit 02).

680573
range 1, lower limit 1000/ N 03).
Acceptable ringing signal frequency: (Hz). SP2-103-005 (parameter

680574
range 2, upper limit 04).

680575
range 2, lower limit 05).
680576 Number of rings until a call is detected 1 06).
The setting must not be zero.
See Note 4.
Minimum required length of the first
680577 20 ms SP2-103-008 (parameter
ring
07).
Minimum required length of the second SP2-103-009 (parameter

680578 20 ms
and subsequent rings 08).
Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-010 (parameter

680579
(LOW) 09).
20 ms
Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011 (parameter
68057A
(HIGH) 10).
68057B
to Not used - Do not change the settings.
680580
Interval between dialing the last digit

and switching the Oh relay over to the
680581 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
external telephone when dialing from
the operation panel in handset mode.
254
NCU Parameters
Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection time

Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 1:0, Bit 0: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
680582 Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection time -
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = 200 ms
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = 800 ms
Other Not used
Bits 4 to 7 - Not used
680583
To Not used - Do not change the settings.
6805A0
Acceptable CED detection frequency

6805A1 If both addresses contain
upper limit (high byte)
BCD (Hz) FF(H), tone detection is
Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
6805A2
upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable CED detection frequency

lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable CED detection frequency disabled.
6805A4
lower limit (low byte)
20 ms ± 20
6805A5 CED detection time Factory setting: 200 ms
ms
Acceptable CNG detection frequency

upper limit (high byte)
Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
6805A7
upper limit (low byte)
Acceptable CNG detection frequency

lower limit (high byte)
Acceptable CNG detection frequency disabled.
6805A9
lower limit (low byte)
6805AA Not used - Do not change the setting.
255
6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms
6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 3000 ms
The data is coded in the

Number of CNG cycles required for
6805AD - same way as address
detection
680533.
6805AE Not used - Do not change the settings.
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805AF (800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (high byte) If both addresses contain
Acceptable AI short protocol tone disabled.
6805B0 (800Hz) detection frequency upper
limit (low byte)
Acceptable AI short protocol tone

6805B1 (800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (high byte) If both addresses contain
Hz(BCD) FF(H), tone detection is
Acceptable AI short protocol tone disabled.
6805B2 (800Hz) detection frequency lower
limit (low byte)
Detection time for 800 Hz AI short

6805B3 20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms
protocol tone
6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm
01).
- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)

6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmission level
See Note 7.
- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)

6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmission level
See Note 7.
6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm
6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmission level - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)
6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmission level - N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)
256
NCU Parameters
Modem turn-on level (incoming signal -37-0.5N

6805BD
detection level) (dBm)
6805BE to
Not used - Do not change the settings.
6805C6
Bits 0 to 3 – Not used

6805C7 Bit 4 = V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)
Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.
6805C8 to
Not used - Do not change the settings.
6805D9
6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1s
1: Maximum wait time for

post message (EOP/EOM/
MPS) can be changed to
6805E0 bit 0: 12 s 30 s.
Maximum wait time for post message
3 1: 30 s Change this bit to "1" if
communication errors occur
frequently during V.17
reception.
0 RT=0 (Low)
Bit 2
Bit 2 sets the level of 1 RT=1 (High)
the call signal, Bit 3
6805E4 0 RZ=0 (High) -
sets the call signal
impedance Bit 3 RZ=1
1
(Composite)
0 Auto
Bit 0 sets the ring Bit 0
detection method, Bit 1 Fixed
1 sets the ring If any setting is changed,
6805E5 detection method 0 Use RDTP select a setting that is higher
when fixed. Bit 1 than the default setting.
1 Use RDTN
Bits 2 to 7: Not used
NOTES
257
1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.

2. Italy and Belgium only
RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.
Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)
Bit 1 - Not used
Bit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)
If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses are changed.
680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off state
duration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address 680533.
68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)
3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is used,
the machine automatically compensates.
4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this
parameter.
5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone:
• – 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
• – 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone:
• – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
• – 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
• N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)

6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and Di
opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di
closing
7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AI short protocol) refer
to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher than 1500Hz refer to the setting at
6805B6h.
8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the
period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.
258
Dedicated Transmission Parameters

There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail
Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated to it.
If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a
Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
Programming Procedure
1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1 (01H).

2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools] > Address Book Management).
3. Select “New program” (To create the new address book) or “Change” (To change already
created address book).
4. Press the "Fax Dest.” or “Email”, and select "Fax Dest." for the fax parameter or select "Email" for E-
mail.
5. Press "Start" key. Make sure that the Start button lamp is blue. (If the system bit switch is not
changed, the button lamp is red.)
6. Select the switch you want to change by pressing “Next” and “Previous” button.
7. Press the “Bit No.” displayed below that you wish to change.
8. After the setting is changed, press "OK" displayed upper above of the panel.
9. Reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0 (00H).
Parameters
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
259
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)

If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting, adjust this
byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1 second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
Tx level If communication with a particular

remote terminal often contains errors,
Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 the signal level may be inappropriate.
0 0 0 0 0 0 Adjust the Tx level for communications
with that terminal until the results are
0 1 0 0 0 –8 better.
0-4
If the setting is "Disabled", the NCU
0 1 1 1 1 –15
parameter 01 setting is used.
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled • Do not use settings other than

listed on the left.
260
Use a higher setting if there is signal

loss at higher frequencies because of
the length of wire between the modem
and the telephone exchange when
calling the number stored in this
Quick/Speed Dial.
Cable equalizer Also, try using the cable equalizer if
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None one or more of the following
symptoms occurs.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low
5-7 Communication error with error codes
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium
such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High
Modem rate fallback occurs
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled frequently.
• Do not use settings other than

listed on the left.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit
switch setting is used.
Switch 02
261
Initial Tx modem rate
Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps
0 0 0 0 Not used
0 0 0 1 2400 If training with a particular remote terminal

always takes too long, the initial modem rate
0 0 1 0 4800 may be too high. Reduce the initial Tx modem
0 0 1 1 7200 rate using these bits.
For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04
0-3 0 1 0 0 9600 bit 4 must be changed to 0.
0 1 0 1 12000
0 1 1 0 14400 • Do not use settings other than listed on the

left. If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch
1 1 0 1 31200 setting is used.
1 1 1 0 33600
1 1 1 1 Disabled
Other settings: Not used
Switch 03
Inch-mm conversion before tx

Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = Inch-mm The machine uses inch-based resolutions for scanning. If
conversion available "inch only" is selected, the printed copy may be slightly
0-1 distorted at the other end if that machine uses mm-based
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch only resolutions.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Not used If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = Disabled
DIS/NSF detection method

Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 = First DIS or NSF (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering
with the set-up protocol at the start of transmission. The
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1 = Second DIS or machine will then wait for the second DIS or NSF before
2-3
NSF sending DCS or NSS.
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Not used If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
262
If transmissions to a specific destination always end at a

V.8 protocol lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower), disable V.8
4 0: Off protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.
1: Disabled 0: V.34 communication will not be possible.

If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.

transmit mode This bit determines the capabilities that are informed to
5 the other terminal during transmission.
0: MH only
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
1: Disabled
For example, if ECM is switched on but is not wanted

when sending to a particular terminal, use the (0, 0)
ECM during transmission
setting.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off
6-7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On
• V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression are
automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.
• If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)
E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00
263
MH Compression mode for

e-mail attachments Switches MH compression on and off for files attached to e-
0
0: Off mails for sending.
1: On
MR Compression mode for

e-mail attachments Switches MR compression on and off for files attached to e-
1
0: Off mails for sending.
1: On
MMR Compression mode for

e-mail attachments Switches MMR compression on and off for files attached to
2
0: Off e-mails for sending.
1: On
Designates the bits to

reference for compression
method of e-mail The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits 00,
7 attachments 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of
Bits 00, 01, 02.
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
1: No registration.
Switch 01
Original width of e-mail

attachment: A4
0 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A4.
0: Off
1: On

attachment: B4
1 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as B4.
0: Off
1: On
264

attachment: A3
2 Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A3.
0: Off
1: On

reference for original size of The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits 00,
7 e-mail attachments 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections of
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) Bits 00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.
Switch 02
Line resolution of e-mail

attachment: 200 x 100 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200
0
0: Off x100.
1: On

attachment: 200 x 200 Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x
1
0: Off 200.
1: On

2
0: Off 400.
1: On

4
0: Off 400.
1: On
265

reference for original size of The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits 00,
7 e-mail attachments 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6) of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.
Switch 04
If the other ends have the addresses, which have the full
mode function flag ("0"), this machine determines them as
Full mode address selection
full mode standard machines.
0: Full mode address
0 • This machine attaches the "demand of reception
1: No full mode (simple confirmation" to a message when transmitting.
mode)
• This machine updates the reception capability to the
address book when receiving.
Switch 05
Direct transmission selection

to SMTP server Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to SMTP
0
0: ON server.
1: OFF
266

Aficio MP 301 Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aficio MP 301 Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aficio MP 301 Series Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Model S-C5

Machine Code: D127/D128

Field Service Manual

Health Safety Conditions

Observance of Electrical Safety Standards

WARNING FOR LASER UNIT

SEF Short Edge Feed

LEF Long Edge Feed

- Core Technology manual

Cautions, Notes, etc.

• Failure to obey warning information could result in serious injury or death.

Standard Component Machine Code Remarks

1 Copier [A] D127/D128 -

Standard expect for EU

3 Platen Cover D607 Standard for EU

Standard only for D128

Optional Components Machine Code Remarks

Two units can be added at

6 Handset [F] D645 NA only

Item Machine Code Remarks

Controller Box - [A] Standard

SD card for the Printer/Scanner Unit

FAX Option D655 [F]

FAX Connection Unit D660 [B]

Browser Unit D656 [B]

VM Card D656 [C] In SD slot 2 (lower)

IEEE 1284 B679 [D]

Optional HDD with Interface board

1. Exposure Glass 17. Bypass Tray

2. LED Unit 18. Bypass Paper End Sensor

3. Platen Cover Sensor 19. Bypass Friction Pad

4. Exit Roller 20. Registration Roller

5. Hot Roller 21. Registration Sensor

6. Exit Sensor 22. (Main) Friction Pad

7. Pressure Roller 23. Paper Feed Roller

8. Scanner Motor 24. Paper End Sensor

9. Cleaning Web Roller 25. TD (Toner Density) Sensor

10. Toner Collection Coil 26. Bottom Plate

11. Cleaning Blade 27. Polygon Mirror Motor

12. OPC drum 28. Laser Unit

13. Discharge Plate 29. Mixing Augers

14. Transfer Roller 30. Development Roller

15. ID (Image Density) Sensor 31. Toner Supply Bottle

16. Bypass Paper Feed Roller 32. Scanner HP Sensor

1. Pull-out Roller 10. Registration Roller

2. Feed Roller 11. Registration Sensor

3. Friction Pad 12. Scanner Guide

4. Paper Stopper 13. ARDF drive motor

5. Pick-up Roller 14. Exit Roller

6. Original Set Feeler 15. Junction Gate

7. Original Set Sensor 16. Inverter Roller

8. Upper Cover Sensor 17. Platen Sheet

9. Original Set Tray

1. LED Unit 10. ID (Image Density) Sensor

2. Scanner HP Sensor 11. Registration Sensor

3. Platen Cover Sensor 12. Paper End Sensor

4. Scanner Motor 13. Toner Density Sensor

5. High-Voltage Power Supply Board 14. Bypass Paper End Sensor

6. Operation Panel Board 15. Right Door Safety Switch